Lexmark Xm5163 Owner S Manual User's Guide

Lexmark-Lexmark-Xm5170-Owner-S-Manual lexmark-lexmark-xm5170-owner-s-manual

2014-07-06

: Lexmark Lexmark-Lexmark-Xm5163-Owner-S-Manual lexmark-lexmark-xm5163-owner-s-manual lexmark pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 366

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

XM5100 Series
User's Guide

September 2012
Machine type(s):
7463
Model(s):
096, 296

www.lexmark.com

Contents

Contents
Safety information.......................................................................................8
Learning about the printer.........................................................................10
Finding information about the printer....................................................................................................10
Selecting a location for the printer..........................................................................................................11
Printer configurations.............................................................................................................................12
Understanding the basic functions of the scanner..................................................................................14
Using the ADF and scanner glass.............................................................................................................15

Understanding the printer control panel....................................................16
Using the printer control panel...............................................................................................................16
Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights........................................................16
Understanding the home screen.............................................................................................................17
Using the touch-screen buttons..............................................................................................................19

Setting up and using the home screen applications....................................21
Finding the IP address of the printer.......................................................................................................21
Finding the IP address of the computer..................................................................................................21
Accessing the Embedded Web Server.....................................................................................................22
Customizing the home screen.................................................................................................................22
Understanding the different applications...............................................................................................23
Activating the home screen applications................................................................................................23
Finding information about the home screen applications................................................................................23
Setting up Forms and Favorites ........................................................................................................................23
Setting up Card Copy ........................................................................................................................................24
Using MyShortcut .............................................................................................................................................25
Setting up Multi Send .......................................................................................................................................25
Setting up Scan to Network ..............................................................................................................................26
Setting up Remote Operator Panel...................................................................................................................27

Exporting and importing a configuration................................................................................................27

Additional printer setup.............................................................................29
Installing internal options........................................................................................................................29
Available internal options .................................................................................................................................29
Accessing the controller board .........................................................................................................................30
Installing a memory card ..................................................................................................................................33
Installing an optional card ................................................................................................................................35

Contents

Installing an Internal Solutions Port..................................................................................................................37
Installing a printer hard disk .............................................................................................................................42
Removing a printer hard disk............................................................................................................................48

Installing hardware options.....................................................................................................................50
Order of installation..........................................................................................................................................50
Installing optional trays ....................................................................................................................................50

Attaching cables......................................................................................................................................53
Setting up the printer software...............................................................................................................55
Installing the printer software ..........................................................................................................................55
Updating available options in the printer driver ..............................................................................................56

Networking..............................................................................................................................................57
Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network..................................................................................57
Installing the printer on an Ethernet network ..................................................................................................58
Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network.....................................................................................59
Connecting the printer using the Wireless Setup Wizard.................................................................................60
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup ....................................................61
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web Server.............................................61
Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port ................................................62
Setting up serial printing...................................................................................................................................63

Verifying printer setup............................................................................................................................65
Printing a menu settings page ..........................................................................................................................65
Printing a network setup page..........................................................................................................................65

Loading paper and specialty media............................................................66
Setting the paper size and type...............................................................................................................66
Configuring Universal paper settings......................................................................................................66
Loading the 250‑ or 550‑sheet tray........................................................................................................66
Loading the 2100‑sheet tray...................................................................................................................72
Loading the multipurpose feeder............................................................................................................78
Linking and unlinking trays......................................................................................................................82
Linking and unlinking trays ...............................................................................................................................82
Creating a custom name for a paper type ........................................................................................................83
Assigning a custom paper type .........................................................................................................................83

Paper and specialty media guide................................................................85
Using specialty media..............................................................................................................................85
Tips on using card stock....................................................................................................................................85
Tips on using envelopes....................................................................................................................................85
Tips on using labels...........................................................................................................................................86
Tips on using letterhead ...................................................................................................................................86
Tips on using transparencies ............................................................................................................................87

Paper guidelines......................................................................................................................................87

Contents

Paper characteristics.........................................................................................................................................87
Selecting paper .................................................................................................................................................88
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead ......................................................................................................88
Using recycled paper and other office papers ..................................................................................................88
Storing paper ....................................................................................................................................................90

Supported paper sizes, types, and weights.............................................................................................90
Paper sizes supported by the printer................................................................................................................90
Paper types and weights supported by the printer ..........................................................................................92

Printing......................................................................................................93
Printing forms and a document...............................................................................................................93
Printing from a mobile device.................................................................................................................94
Printing from a flash drive.......................................................................................................................95
Printing confidential and other held jobs................................................................................................97
Printing information pages......................................................................................................................99
Canceling a print job................................................................................................................................99

Copying....................................................................................................101
Making copies.......................................................................................................................................101
Copying photos......................................................................................................................................102
Copying on specialty media...................................................................................................................102
Creating a copy shortcut using the printer control panel.....................................................................103
Customizing copy settings.....................................................................................................................104
Placing information on copies...............................................................................................................109
Canceling a copy job..............................................................................................................................110
Understanding the copy options...........................................................................................................110

E-mailing..................................................................................................113
Setting up the printer to e-mail.............................................................................................................113
Creating an e-mail shortcut...................................................................................................................114
E-mailing a document............................................................................................................................115
Customizing e-mail settings...................................................................................................................116
Canceling an e-mail...............................................................................................................................117
Understanding the e-mail options........................................................................................................117

Faxing......................................................................................................120
Setting up the printer to fax..................................................................................................................120
Sending a fax.........................................................................................................................................135
Creating shortcuts.................................................................................................................................138

Contents

Customizing fax settings........................................................................................................................139
Canceling an outgoing fax.....................................................................................................................140
Holding and forwarding faxes...............................................................................................................140
Understanding the fax options..............................................................................................................141

Scanning...................................................................................................144
Using Scan to Network..........................................................................................................................144
Scanning to an FTP address...................................................................................................................144
Scanning to a computer or flash drive..................................................................................................147
Understanding the scan options...........................................................................................................149

Understanding the printer menus............................................................152
Menus list..............................................................................................................................................152
Paper menu...........................................................................................................................................153
Reports Menu........................................................................................................................................164
Network/Ports menu.............................................................................................................................165
Security menu.......................................................................................................................................178
Settings menu........................................................................................................................................183
Help menu.............................................................................................................................................228

Saving money and the environment.........................................................229
Saving paper and toner.........................................................................................................................229
Using recycled paper ......................................................................................................................................229
Conserving supplies ........................................................................................................................................229

Saving energy........................................................................................................................................230
Using Eco‑Mode..............................................................................................................................................230
Reducing printer noise....................................................................................................................................230
Adjusting Sleep mode .....................................................................................................................................231
Using Hibernate mode ....................................................................................................................................232
Adjusting the brightness of the printer display ..............................................................................................232

Recycling................................................................................................................................................233
Recycling Lexmark products ...........................................................................................................................233
Recycling Lexmark packaging..........................................................................................................................233
Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling......................................................................................233

Securing the printer..................................................................................235
Statement of Volatility..........................................................................................................................235
Erasing volatile memory........................................................................................................................235
Erasing non‑volatile memory................................................................................................................236

Contents

Erasing printer hard disk memory.........................................................................................................236
Configuring printer hard disk encryption..............................................................................................237
Finding printer security information.....................................................................................................238

Maintaining the printer............................................................................239
Cleaning the printer parts.....................................................................................................................239
Cleaning the printer ........................................................................................................................................239
Cleaning the scanner glass..............................................................................................................................240

Checking the status of parts and supplies.............................................................................................242
Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel......................................................... 242
Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server .................................................242

Ordering parts and supplies..................................................................................................................243
Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies.....................................................................................................243
Estimated number of remaining pages...........................................................................................................243
Ordering a toner cartridge..............................................................................................................................243
Ordering an imaging unit ................................................................................................................................243
Ordering a maintenance kit ............................................................................................................................244

Storing supplies.....................................................................................................................................245
Replacing supplies.................................................................................................................................245
Replacing the toner cartridge .........................................................................................................................245
Replacing the imaging unit .............................................................................................................................247

Moving the printer................................................................................................................................251
Before moving the printer ..............................................................................................................................251
Moving the printer to another location..........................................................................................................252
Shipping the printer ........................................................................................................................................252

Managing the printer...............................................................................253
Finding advanced networking and administrator information.............................................................253
Checking the virtual display...................................................................................................................253
Setting up e‑mail alerts.........................................................................................................................253
Viewing reports.....................................................................................................................................253
Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server.......................................................254
Restoring factory default settings.........................................................................................................255

Clearing jams............................................................................................256
Avoiding jams........................................................................................................................................256
Understanding jam messages and locations.........................................................................................257
[x]‑page jam, lift front cover to remove cartridge. [200–201]..............................................................259
[x]‑page jam, open upper rear door. [202]...........................................................................................262
[x]‑page jam, open upper and lower rear door. [231–234]..................................................................263

Contents

[x]‑page jam, remove standard bin jam. [203]......................................................................................265
[x]‑page jam, remove tray 1 to clear duplex. [235–239].......................................................................266
[x]‑page jam, open tray [x]. [24x]..........................................................................................................267
[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder. [250]..............................................................................................268
[x]‑page jam, open automatic feeder top cover. [28y.xx].....................................................................270

Troubleshooting.......................................................................................272
Understanding printer messages..........................................................................................................272
Solving printer problems.......................................................................................................................289
Solving print problems..........................................................................................................................296
Solving copy problems..........................................................................................................................322
Solving fax problems.............................................................................................................................325
Solving scanner problems.....................................................................................................................331
Solving home screen applications problems.........................................................................................336
Embedded Web Server does not open.................................................................................................336
Contacting customer support................................................................................................................337

Notices.....................................................................................................338
Product information..............................................................................................................................338
Edition notice........................................................................................................................................338
Power consumption..............................................................................................................................342

Index........................................................................................................355

Safety information

Safety information
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible.
Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release emissions.
You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media
to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced. There is a
danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble, or incinerate a
lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local
regulations.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:

• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
• If an optional tray is installed, then remove it from the printer. To remove the optional tray, slide the latch on the
right side of the tray toward the front of the tray until it clicks into place.

• Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.
• Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
• Before setting up the printer, make sure there is adequate clearance around it.
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
Use only the telecommunications (RJ‑11) cord provided with this product or a 26 AWG or larger replacement when
connecting this product to the public switched telephone network.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system
connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific
manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not
responsible for the use of other replacement parts.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not
subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture
and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly
for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.

Safety information

Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a service representative.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a
multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all
other trays closed until needed.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

Learning about the printer

Learning about the printer
Finding information about the printer
What are you looking for?

Find it here

Initial setup instructions:

Setup documentation—The setup documentation came
with the printer and is also available at
http://support.lexmark.com.

• Connecting the printer
• Installing the printer software
Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Selecting and storing paper and specialty media
Loading paper
Configuring printer settings

User's Guide and Quick Reference Guide—The guides are
available on the Documentation CD.
For more information, visit
http://support.lexmark.com.

Viewing and printing documents and photos
Setting up and using the printer software
Configuring the printer on a network
Caring for and maintaining the printer
Troubleshooting and solving problems

Instructions for:

• Connecting the printer to an Ethernet network
• Troubleshooting printer connection problems
Help using the printer software

Networking Guide—Open the Software CD, and then look
for Printer and Software Documentation under the Pubs
folder. From the list of publications, click the Networking
Guide link.
Windows or Mac Help—Open a printer software program
or application, and then click Help.
Click

to view context‑sensitive information.

Notes:

• Help is automatically installed with the printer
software.

• The printer software is located in the printer
program folder or on the desktop, depending on
your operating system.

Learning about the printer

What are you looking for?

Find it here

The latest supplemental information, updates, and customer
support:

Lexmark Support Web site—
http://support.lexmark.com

•
•
•
•
•

Documentation

Note: Select your country or region, and then select
your product to view the appropriate support site.

Driver downloads

Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for
your country or region can be found on the Support Web
site or on the printed warranty that came with your
printer.

Live chat support
E‑mail support
Voice support

Record the following information (located on the store
receipt and at the back of the printer), and have it ready
when you contact customer support so that they may
serve you faster:

•
•
•
•
Warranty information

Machine Type number
Serial number
Date purchased
Store where purchased

Warranty information varies by country or region:

• In the U.S.—See the Statement of Limited Warranty
included with this printer, or at
http://support.lexmark.com.

• In other countries and regions—See the printed
warranty that came with your printer.

Selecting a location for the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install any
options, then leave enough room for them also. It is important to:

• Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet.
• Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee
156 standard.

• Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
• Keep the printer:
– Clean, dry, and free of dust.
– Away from stray staples and paper clips.
– Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators.
– Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes.
• Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations:
Ambient temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
Storage temperature

1 to 35°C (34 to 95°F)

• Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:

Learning about the printer

4
1

Right side 15 cm (6 in.)

Front

39.4 cm (15.5 in.)

Left side

15 cm (6 in.)

Rear

15 cm (6 in.)

Top

15 cm (6 in.)

Printer configurations
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a
multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.

Learning about the printer

Basic model
1
2

Automatic document feeder (ADF)

ADF tray

ADF bin

Standard bin

Printer control panel

100‑sheet multipurpose feeder

Standard 550‑sheet tray

Learning about the printer

Fully configured model
The following illustration shows the maximum number of optional trays that are supported by the printer. For more
information on other configurations, visit www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.

4
2

Optional 550‑sheet tray

Optional 250‑sheet trays

Caster base

Optional 2100‑sheet tray

When using optional trays:

• Always use a caster base when the printer is configured with an optional 2100‑sheet tray.
• The optional 2100‑sheet tray must always be at the bottom of a configuration and may be paired with only one
optional 250‑ or 550‑sheet tray.

• You may combine three optional 250‑ or 550‑sheet trays and install them in any order.

Understanding the basic functions of the scanner
•
•
•
•
•

Make quick copies or set the printer to perform specific copy jobs.
Send a fax using the printer control panel.
Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.
Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, a flash drive, or an FTP destination.
Scan documents and send them to another printer (PDF through an FTP).

Learning about the printer

Using the ADF and scanner glass
Scanner glass

Automatic document feeder (ADF)

Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including two- Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents, book pages,
sided (duplex) pages.
small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

You can use the ADF or the scanner glass to scan documents.

Using the ADF
When using the ADF:

•
•
•
•
•

Load the document into the ADF tray faceup, short edge first.
Load up to 150 sheets of plain paper into the ADF tray.
Scan sizes from 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) wide to 216 x 635 mm (8.5 x 25 inches) long
Scan media weighs from 52 to 120 g/m2 (14–32 lb).
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings)
into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

Using the scanner glass
When using the scanner glass:

• Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the corner with the green arrow.
• Scan or copy documents up to 216 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).
• Copy books up to 25.3 mm (1 inch) thick.

Understanding the printer control panel

Understanding the printer control panel
Using the printer control panel
1

1 @!.
4
7

GHI

3 DEF

2 ABC
5

8 TUV

6 MNO

JKL

PQRS

WXYZ

5
8

Use the

7 6

Display

Home button

Go to the home screen.

Sleep button

Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.

• View the printer status and messages.
• Set up and operate the printer.

Do the following to wake the printer from Sleep mode:

•
•
•
•
•

Touch the screen or press any hard button.
Open a door or cover.
Send a print job from the computer.
Perform a power‑on reset (POR) with the main power switch.
Attach a device to the USB port on the printer.

Keypad

Enter numbers, letters, or symbols.

Start button

Start a job, depending on which mode is selected.

Clear All / Reset button Reset the default settings of a function, such as copying, faxing, or scanning.

Cancel button

Cancel all printer activity.

Indicator light

Check the status of the printer.

USB port

Connect a flash drive to the printer.
Note: Only the front USB port supports flash drives.

Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator
lights
The colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights on the printer control panel signify a certain printer status or condition.

Understanding the printer control panel

Indicator light color and its corresponding printer status
Indicator light

Printer status

Off

The printer is off or in Hibernate mode.

Blinking green

The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.

Solid green

The printer is on, but idle.

Blinking red

The printer requires user intervention.

Sleep button light color and its corresponding printer status
Sleep button light

Printer status

Off

The printer is off, idle or in Ready state.

Solid amber

The printer is in Sleep mode.

Blinking amber

The printer is entering or waking from Hibernate mode.

Blinking amber for 0.1 second, then goes
completely off for 1.9 seconds in a slow,
pulsing pattern

The printer is in Hibernate mode.

Understanding the home screen
When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Touch the home screen
buttons and icons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or scanning; to open the menu screen; or to respond to
messages.
Note: Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and
active embedded solutions.
1

6
14
7
13

8
12 11

Touch

Change Language

Launch the Change Language pop‑up window that lets you change the primary language of
the printer.

Copy

Access the Copy menus and make copies.

Fax

Access the Fax menus and send fax.

E-mail

Access the E-mail menus and send e‑mails.

Understanding the printer control panel

Touch

FTP

Access the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus and scan documents directly to an FTP server.

Arrows

Scroll up or down.

Forms and Favorites Quickly find and print frequently used online forms.

Menu icon

Access the printer menus.
Note: The menus are available only when the printer is in Ready state.

Bookmarks

Create, organize, and save a set of bookmarks (URL) into a tree view of folders and file links.
Note: The tree view supports only bookmarks created from this function, and not from any
other application.

USB Drive

View, select, print, scan, or e‑mail photos and documents from a flash drive.
Note: This icon appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory card or
flash drive is connected to the printer.

Held Jobs

Status/Supplies

Display all current held jobs.

• Show a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue
processing.

• Access the messages screen for more information on the message, and how to clear it.
13

Tips

Open a context-sensitive Help dialog.

Search Held Jobs

Search for one or more of the following items:

•
•
•
•
•

User name for held or confidential print jobs
Job names for held jobs, excluding confidential print jobs
Profile names
Bookmark container or print job names
USB container or print job names for supported file types

Features
Feature

Description

Menu trail line

A menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen. This feature shows the
path taken to arrive at the current menu.

Example:
Menus > Settings > Copy Settings >
Number of Copies

Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu.
Number of Copies is not underlined because it is the current screen. If you touch an
underlined word on the “Number of Copies” screen before the number of copies is
set and saved, then the selection is not saved, and it does not become the default
setting.

Attendance message alert

If an attendance message affects a function, then this icon appears and the red
indicator light blinks.

Understanding the printer control panel

Feature

Description

Warning

If an error condition occurs, then this icon appears.

Status message bar

• Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy.
• Show printer conditions such as Toner Low or Cartridge Low.
• Show intervention messages so the printer can continue processing.

Printer IP address

The IP address of your network printer is located at the upper left corner of the
home screen and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods. You can
use the IP address when accessing the Embedded Web Server so you can view and
remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the
printer.

Example:
123.123.123.123

Using the touch-screen buttons
Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary, depending on your home screen customization settings,
administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.

Touch

Arrows

View a list of options.

Copy It

Print a copy.

Advanced Options Select a copy option.

Home

Go to the home screen.

Increase

Select a higher value.

Decrease

Select a lower value.

Tips

Open a context-sensitive Help dialog.

Understanding the printer control panel

Other touch-screen buttons
Touch

Save a setting.

Cancel

Reset

• Cancel an action or a selection.
• Exit a screen and return to the previous screen without saving changes.

Reset values on the screen.

Setting up and using the home screen applications

Setting up and using the home screen applications
Notes:

• Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings,
administrative setup, and active applications.

• There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase. To learn more, visit
www.lexmark.com or inquire at your point of purchase.

Finding the IP address of the printer
Note: Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.
You can find the printer IP address:

• From the top left corner of the printer home screen.
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

Finding the IP address of the computer
Note: Make sure that you know how your printer and computer are connected to the network (Ethernet or
wireless).
The computer IP address is required when setting up home screen applications, such as:

• Forms and Favorites
• Multi Send
• Scan to Network

For Windows users
1 Open the command window.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type cmd > OK

In Windows 7 or earlier
a Click
or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type cmd.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
2 Type ipconfig, and then click Go or press Enter.
Note: Type ipconfig /all to see additional useful information.

Setting up and using the home screen applications

3 Look for IP Address.
The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

For Macintosh users
Note: This is applicable only in Mac OS X version 10.5 or later.

1 From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Network

2 Click Ethernet, Wi‑Fi, or AirPort.
3 Click Advanced > TCP/IP.
4 Look for IPv4 Address.

Accessing the Embedded Web Server
The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even
when you are not physically near the printer.

1 Obtain the printer IP address:
• From the printer control panel home screen
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
3 Press Enter.
Note: If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

Customizing the home screen
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2 Do one or more of the following:
• Show or hide the icons of basic printer functions.
a Click Settings > General Settings > Home screen customization.
b Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the home screen.
Note: If you clear a check box beside an icon, then the icon does not appear on the home screen.

c Click Submit.
• Customize the icon for an application. For more information, see “Finding information about the home screen
applications” on page 23 or see the documentation that came with the application.

Setting up and using the home screen applications

Understanding the different applications
Use

Card Copy

Scan and print both sides of a card on a single page. For more information, see “Setting up Card Copy”
on page 24.

Fax

Scan a document, and then send it to a fax number. For more information, see “Faxing” on page
120.

Forms and Favorites Quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen. For more
information, see “Setting up Forms and Favorites” on page 23.
Multi Send

Scan a document, and then send it to multiple destinations. For more information, see “Setting up
Multi Send” on page 25.

MyShortcut

Create shortcuts directly on the printer home screen. For more information, see “Using MyShortcut”
on page 25.

Scan to E‑mail

Scan a document, and then send it to an e‑mail address. For more information, see “E-mailing” on
page 113.

Scan to Computer

Scan a document, and then save it to a predefined folder on a host computer. For more information,
see “Setting up Scan to Computer” on page 148.

Scan to FTP

Scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. For more information, see “Scanning
to an FTP address” on page 145.

Scan to Network

Scan a document, and then send it to a network shared folder. For more information, see “Setting
up Scan to Network” on page 26.

Activating the home screen applications
Finding information about the home screen applications
Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications. Before you can use these applications, you must first
activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server. For more information on accessing the
Embedded Web Server, see “Accessing the Embedded Web Server” on page 22.
For more information on configuring and using the home screen applications, do the following:

1 Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then do either of the following:
• Click Business Solutions, and then select the name of the application.
• Click Software and Solutions, and then select either of the following:
– Scan to Network—Find information about the Scan to Network application.
– Other Applications—Find information about the other applications.
2 Click the Manuals tab, and then select the document for the home screen application.

Setting up Forms and Favorites
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User’s Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.

Setting up and using the home screen applications

Use

To
Streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly
from the printer home screen.
Note: The printer must have permission to access the network folder, FTP site, or Web site where the
bookmark is stored. From the computer where the bookmark is stored, use sharing, security, and
firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access. For help, see the documentation that
came with your operating system.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Forms and Favorites.
3 Click Add, and then customize the settings.
Notes:

• See the mouse-over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
• To make sure the location settings of the bookmark are correct, type the correct IP address of the host
computer where the bookmark is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host
computer, see “Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 21.

• Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the bookmark is located.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen, and then navigate through form
categories, or search for forms based on a form number, name, or description.

Setting up Card Copy
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use

To
Quickly and easily copy insurance, identification, and other wallet‑size cards.
You can scan and print both sides of a card on a single page, saving paper and showing the information
on the card in a more convenient manner.

2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Card Copy.

Setting up and using the home screen applications

3 Change the default scanning options, if necessary.
• Default tray—Select the default tray to be used for printing scan images.
• Default number of copies—Specify the number of copies that should automatically print when the application
is used.

• Default contrast setting—Specify a setting to increase or decrease the level of contrast when a copy of the
scanned card is printed. Select Best for Content if you want the printer to adjust the contrast automatically.

• Default scale setting—Set the size of the scanned card when printed. The default setting is 100% (full size).
• Resolution setting—Adjust the quality of the scanned card.
Notes:

– When scanning a card, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 200 dpi for color, and 400 dpi for
black and white.
– When scanning multiple cards, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 150 dpi for color, and
300 dpi for black and white.

• Print Borders—Select the check box to print the scan image with a border around it.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Card Copy on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions.

Using MyShortcut
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use

To
Create shortcuts on the printer home screen, with settings for up to 25 frequently used copy, fax, or email jobs.

To use the application, touch MyShortcut, and then follow the instructions on the printer display.

Setting up Multi Send
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use

To
Scan a document, and then send the scanned document to multiple destinations.
Note: Make sure there is enough space in the printer hard disk.

Setting up and using the home screen applications

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The printer IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Multi Send.
3 From the Profiles section, click Add, and then customize the settings.
Notes:

• See the mouse‑over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
• If you select FTP or Share Folder as a destination, then make sure the location settings of the destination are
correct. Type the correct IP address of the host computer where the specified destination is located. For
more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer, see “Finding the IP address of the
computer” on page 21.

4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Multi Send on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the printer
display.

Setting up Scan to Network
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use

To
Scan a document and send it to a shared network folder. You can define up to 30 unique folder
destinations.
Notes:

• The printer must have permission to write to the destinations. From the computer where the
destination is specified, use sharing, security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a
write access. For help, see the documentation that came with your operating system.

• The Scan to Network icon appears only when one or more destinations are defined.

2 Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Scan to Network.
3 Specify the destinations, and then customize the settings.
Notes:

• See the mouse-over help beside some of the fields for a description of the setting.
• To make sure the location settings of the destination are correct, type the correct IP address of the host
computer where the specified destination is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of
the host computer, see “Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 21.

• Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the specified destination is located.
4 Click Apply.

Setting up and using the home screen applications

To use the application, touch Scan to Network on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the
printer display.

Setting up Remote Operator Panel
This application shows the printer control panel on your computer screen and lets you interact with the printer control
panel, even when you are not physically near the network printer. From your computer screen, you can view the printer
status, release held print jobs, create bookmarks, and do other print-related tasks you might normally do while standing
at the network printer.

2 Click Settings > Remote Operator Panel Settings.
3 Select the Enabled check box, and then customize the settings.
4 Click Submit.
To use the application, click Remote Operator Panel > Launch VNC Applet.

Exporting and importing a configuration
You can export configuration settings into a text file, and then import the file to apply the settings to other printers.

2 To export or import a configuration for one application, do the following:
a Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management.
b From the list of installed applications, click the name of the application you want to configure.
c Click Configure, and then do either of the following:
• To export a configuration to a file, click Export, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen to
save the configuration file.
Notes:

– When saving the configuration file, you can type a unique file name or use the default name.
– If a "JVM Out of Memory” error occurs, then repeat the export process until the configuration file is
saved.

• To import a configuration from a file, click Import, and then browse to the saved configuration file that was
exported from a previously configured printer.
Notes:

– Before importing the configuration file, you can choose to preview it first or load it directly.
– If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears, then refresh the Web browser, and then click Apply.

Setting up and using the home screen applications

3 To export or import a configuration for multiple applications, do the following:
a Click Settings > Import/Export.
b Do either of the following:
• To export a configuration file, click Export Embedded Solutions Settings File, and then follow the instructions
on the computer screen to save the configuration file.

• To import a configuration file, do the following:
1 Click Import Embedded Solutions Settings File > Choose File, and then browse to the saved configuration
file that was exported from a previously configured printer.
2 Click Submit.

Additional printer setup

Additional printer setup
Installing internal options
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.

Available internal options
• Memory card
– DDR3 DIMM
– Flash memory
• Fonts
• Firmware cards
– Forms barcode
– PRESCRIBE
– IPDS
– Printcryption
• LexmarkTM Internal Solutions Ports (ISP)
– Parallel 1284-B interface
– MarkNetTM N8350 802.11 b/g/n wireless printer server
– MarkNet N8130 10/100 fiber interface
– RS-232-C serial interface

Additional printer setup

Accessing the controller board
Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

1 Open the controller board access cover.

2 Using a screwdriver, loosen the screws on the controller board shield.

Additional printer setup

3 Remove the shield.

4 Use the following illustration to locate the appropriate connector.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or
connectors.
1

Lexmark Internal Solutions Port or printer hard disk connector

Option card connector

Memory card connector

Additional printer setup

5 Reattach the shield, and then align the screws with the holes.

6 Tighten the screws on the shield.

Additional printer setup

7 Close the access cover.

Installing a memory card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer first before touching any controller board electronic components or
connectors.
An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the controller board.

1 Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 30.

2 Unpack the memory card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card. Doing so may
cause damage.

Additional printer setup

3 Align the notch (1) on the memory card with the ridge (2) on the connector.

1
2

4 Push the memory card straight into the connector, and then push the card toward the controller board wall until
it clicks into place.

5 Reattach the controller board shield, and then the controller board access cover.

Additional printer setup

Installing an optional card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have other devices attached to the printer, then turn them
off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.

1 Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 30.

2 Unpack the optional card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.

3 Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins (1) on the card with the holes (2) on the controller board.
1

Additional printer setup

4 Push the card firmly into place as shown in the illustration.

Warning—Potential Damage: Improper installation of the card may cause damage to the card and the
controller board.
Note: The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flushed against the controller board.

5 Close the controller board access door.
Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add
the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating
available options in the printer driver” on page 56.

Additional printer setup

Installing an Internal Solutions Port
The controller board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP).
Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer first before touching any controller board electronic components or
connectors.

1 Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 30.

2 If a printer hard disk is installed, then remove the printer hard disk first.
For more information, see “Removing a printer hard disk” on page 48.

3 Unpack the ISP kit.
1

2
4

ISP solution

Screw for attaching the plastic bracket to the ISP

Screws for attaching the ISP mounting bracket to the controller board shield

Plastic bracket

Additional printer setup

4 Remove the metal cover from the ISP opening.
a Loosen the screw.

b Lift the metal cover, and then pull it out completely.

Additional printer setup

5 Align the posts of the plastic bracket to the holes on the controller board cage, and then press the plastic bracket
on the controller board cage until it clicks into place.

Note: Make sure that the plastic bracket has latched completely, and that the plastic bracket is seated firmly on
the cage.

6 Install the ISP on the plastic bracket.

Note: Hold the ISP at an angle over the plastic bracket so that any overhanging connectors will pass through the
ISP opening in the cage.

Additional printer setup

7 Lower the ISP toward the plastic bracket until the ISP is seated between the guides of the plastic bracket.

8 Use the provided thumbscrew for the ISP to attach the plastic bracket to the ISP.

Note: Turn the screw clockwise, enough to hold the ISP in place, but do not tighten it yet.

Additional printer setup

9 Attach the two provided screws to secure the ISP mounting bracket to the controller board shield.

10 Tighten the thumbscrew that is attached to the ISP.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not screw it on too tightly.

Additional printer setup

11 Connect the ISP solution interface cable into the receptacle of the controller board.

Note: The plugs and receptacles are color-coded.

Installing a printer hard disk
Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.

1 Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 30.

2 Unpack the printer hard disk.

Additional printer setup

3 Locate the appropriate connector on the controller board cage.

Note: If an optional ISP is currently installed, then the printer hard disk must be installed onto the ISP.

Additional printer setup

To install a printer hard disk onto the ISP:

a Remove the screws attached to the printer hard disk mounting bracket, and then remove the bracket.

b Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the ISP, and then press the printer hard disk down
until the standoffs are in place.
Installation warning: Hold only the edges of the printed circuit board assembly. Do not touch or press on
the center of the printer hard disk. Doing so may cause damage.

c Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color‑coded.

Additional printer setup

To install a printer hard disk directly on the controller board cage:

a Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the controller board cage, and then press the printer
hard disk down until the standoffs are in place.
Installation warning: Hold only the edges of the printed circuit board assembly. Do not touch or press on
the center of the printer hard disk. Doing so may cause damage.

Additional printer setup

b Use the two provided screws to attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket.

c Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the controller board.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color‑coded.

Additional printer setup

Removing a printer hard disk
Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.

1 Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 30.

2 Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the controller board, leaving the cable attached to the printer
hard disk. To unplug the cable, squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before
pulling out the cable.

Additional printer setup

3 Remove the screws holding the printer hard disk in place.

4 Remove the printer hard disk.

5 Set aside the printer hard disk.

Additional printer setup

Installing hardware options
Order of installation
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a
multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
Install the printer and any hardware options you have purchased in the following order:

•
•
•
•

Caster base
2100‑sheet tray or spacer
Optional 550‑ or 250‑sheet tray
Printer

For more information on installing a caster base, optional 250‑ or 550‑sheet tray, spacer, or 2100‑sheet tray, see the
setup sheet that came with the option.

Installing optional trays
The printer supports the following optional input sources:

• 250‑ or 550‑sheet tray
• 2100‑sheet tray
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a
multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.

1 Turn off the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.

Additional printer setup

2 Unpack the optional tray, and then remove all packing material.
3 Pull out the tray completely from the base.

4 Remove any packing material from inside the tray.
5 Insert the tray into the base.
6 Place the tray near the printer.
7 Lock the wheels of the caster base to secure the printer, then align the printer with the tray, and then slowly lower
the printer into place.
Note: Optional trays lock together when stacked.

Additional printer setup

8 Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.

Additional printer setup

Note: When the printer software and any optional trays are installed, you may need to manually add the
options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating
available options in the printer driver” on page 56.
To uninstall the optional trays, slide the latch on the right side of the printer toward the front of the printer until
it clicks into place, and then remove stacked trays one at a time from the top to the bottom.

Attaching cables
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product
or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or to the network using an Ethernet cable.
Make sure to match the following:

• The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer
• The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port

Additional printer setup

7
6
5

Use the

EXT port

Connect additional devices (telephone or answering machine) to the printer and
the telephone line. Use this port if you do not have a dedicated fax line for the
printer and if this connection method is supported in your country or region.
Note: Remove the plug to access the port.

LINE port

Connect the printer to an active telephone line through a standard wall jack
(RJ‑11), DSL filter, or VoIP adapter, or any other adapter that allows you to access
the telephone line to send and receive faxes.

Printer power cord socket

Connect the printer to a properly grounded electrical outlet.

USB printer port

Connect the printer to a computer.

Ethernet port

Connect the printer to a network.

Internal Solutions Port (ISP) or
printer hard disk slot

Attach an ISP or a printer hard disk.

Note: If the printer has support
for wireless connection, then the
wireless antenna is attached
here.
7

USB port

Attach an optional wireless network adapter.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any wireless network adapter, or the printer in the area
shown while actively printing. Loss of data or a malfunction can occur.

Additional printer setup

Organizing cables
Attach the Ethernet cable and power cord, and then neatly tuck the cables in the channels at the back of the printer.

Setting up the printer software
Installing the printer software
Notes:

• If you installed the printer software on the computer before but need to reinstall the software, then uninstall
the current software first.

• Close all open software programs before installing the printer software.
• For Macintosh users, you may download all the drivers and utilities from our Web site.

Additional printer setup

1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
• From the Software CD that came with your printer
• From our Web site:
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system

2 Double‑click the software installer package.
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.
If you are using the Software CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the following:

In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe > OK.

In Windows 7 or earlier
a Click
or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.

3 Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Updating available options in the printer driver
When any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the options in the printer driver to make
them available for use.

For Windows users
1 Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier

a Click
or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
2 Depending on your device, do either of the following:
• Press and hold the printer you want to update.
• Right‑click the printer you want to update.

Additional printer setup

3 From the menu that appears, do either of the following:
• For Windows 7 or later, select Printer properties.
• For earlier versions, select Properties.
4 Click the Configuration tab.
5 Do either of the following:
• Click Update Now ‑ Ask Printer.
• Under Configuration Options, manually add any installed hardware options.
6 Click Apply.

For Macintosh users
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
• System Preferences > Print & Scan > select your printer > Options & Supplies > Driver
• System Preferences > Print & Fax > select your printer > Options & Supplies > Driver
2 Add any installed hardware options, and then click OK.

Networking
Notes:

• Purchase a MarkNet N8350 wireless network adapter first before setting up the printer on a wireless network.
For information on installing the wireless network adapter, see the setup sheet that came with the adapter.

• A Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name assigned to a wireless network. Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP), Wi-Fi
Protected Access (WPA), and WPA2 are types of security used on a network.

Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network
To configure your printer to connect to an Ethernet network, organize the following information before you begin:
Note: If your network automatically assigns IP addresses to computers and printers, continue on to installing the
printer.

•
•
•
•

A valid, unique IP address for the printer to use on the network
The network gateway
The network mask
A nickname for the printer (optional)
Note: A printer nickname can make it easier for you to identify your printer on the network. You can choose to
use the default printer nickname, or assign a name that is easier for you to remember.

You will need an Ethernet cable to connect the printer to the network and an available port where the printer can
physically connect to the network. Use a new network cable when possible to avoid potential problems caused by a
damaged cable.

Additional printer setup

Installing the printer on an Ethernet network
For Windows users
1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
• From the Software CD that came with your printer
• From our Web site:
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system

2 Double‑click the software installer package.
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.
If you are using the Software CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the following:
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier

a Click
or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.

3 Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
4 Select Ethernet connection, and then click Continue.
5 Attach the Ethernet cable when instructed to do so.
6 Select the printer from the list, and then click Continue.
Note: If the configured printer does not appear in the list, then click Modify Search.

7 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
For Macintosh users
1 Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer.
2 Obtain the printer IP address either:
• From the printer control panel
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.

3 Install the printer driver on the computer.
a Download the driver at http://support.lexmark.com.
b Double‑click the installer package for the printer, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
c Select a destination, and then click Continue.

Additional printer setup

d From the Easy Install screen, click Install.
e Type the user password, and then click OK.
All the necessary applications are installed on the computer.

f Click Close when installation is complete.
4 Add the printer.
• For IP printing:
a From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
– System Preferences > Print & Scan
– System Preferences > Print & Fax
b Click +.
c Click the IP tab.
d Type the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.
• For AppleTalk printing:
Notes:

– Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.
– This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10.5.
a From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
b Click +, and then navigate to:
AppleTalk > select your printer > Add

Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network
Notes:

• Make sure your wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.

• Make sure your access point (wireless router) is turned on and is working properly.
Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network:

• SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.
• Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc.
• Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks.
Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting. Check with your system support person if you are
not sure which channel to select.

• Security Method—There are four basic options for Security Method:
– WEP key
If your network uses more than one WEP key, then enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key
currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key.

– WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase
WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be set
for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate on the
network.

– 802.1X–RADIUS

Additional printer setup

If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network, then you may need the following:

•
•
•
•

Authentication type
Inner authentication type
802.1X user name and password
Certificates

– No security
If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.
Note: We do not recommend using an unsecured wireless network.
Notes:

– If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to, then launch the wireless utility
of the computer network adapter, and then look for the network name. If you cannot find the SSID or the
security information for your network, then see the documentation that came with the access point, or contact
your system support person.

– To find the WPA/WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network, see the documentation that
came with the access point, see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point, or consult your
system support person.

Connecting the printer using the Wireless Setup Wizard
Before you begin, make sure that:

• A wireless network adapter is installed in the printer and is working properly. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.

• An Ethernet cable is disconnected from the printer.
• Active NIC is set to Auto. To set this to Auto, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Active NIC > Auto > Submit
Note: Make sure to turn off the printer, then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn the printer back on.

1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup

2 Select a wireless connection setup.
Use

Search for networks

Show available wireless connections.
Note: This menu item shows all broadcast secured or unsecured SSIDs.

Enter a network name Manually type the SSID.
Note: Make sure to type the correct SSID.
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup Connect the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup.

3 Follow the instructions on the printer display.

Additional printer setup

Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup
Before you begin, make sure that:

• The access point (wireless router) is Wi‑Fi Protected Setup (WPS) certified or WPS‑compatible. For more
information, see the documentation that came with your access point.

• A wireless network adapter installed in your printer is attached and working properly. For more information, see
the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.

Using the Push Button Configuration method
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup > Wi‑Fi Protected
Setup > Start Push Button Method

2 Follow the instructions on the printer display.
Using the Personal Identification Number (PIN) method
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup > Wi‑Fi Protected
Setup > Start PIN Method

2 Copy the eight‑digit WPS PIN.
3 Open a Web browser, and then type the IP address of your access point in the address field.
Notes:

• The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
4 Access the WPS settings. For more information, see the documentation that came with your access point.
5 Enter the eight‑digit PIN, and then save the setting.

Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web Server
Before you begin, make sure that:

• Your printer is connected temporarily to an Ethernet network.
• A wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless.

Additional printer setup

3 Modify the settings to match the settings of your access point (wireless router).
Note: Make sure to enter the correct SSID, security method, preshared key or passphrase, network mode, and
channel.

4 Click Submit.
5 Turn off the printer, and then disconnect the Ethernet cable. Then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.

6 To verify if your printer is connected to the network, print a network setup page. Then in the Network Card [x]
section, see if the status is Connected.

Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port
When a new Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed in the printer, the printer configurations on computers
that access the printer must be updated since the printer will be assigned a new IP address. All computers that access
the printer must be updated with this new IP address.
Notes:

• If the printer has a static IP address, then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations.
• If the computers are configured to use the network name, instead of an IP address, then you do not need to
make any changes to your computer configurations.

• If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for an Ethernet connection, then make sure
the printer is disconnected from the Ethernet network when you configure the printer to operate wirelessly. If
the printer is connected to the Ethernet network, then the wireless configuration completes, but the wireless
ISP is inactive. To activate the wireless ISP, disconnect the printer from the Ethernet network, turn off the
printer, and then turn it back on.

• Only one network connection is active at a time. To switch between Ethernet and wireless connection types,
turn off the printer, connect the cable (to switch to an Ethernet connection) or disconnect the cable (to switch
to a wireless connection), and then turn the printer back on.

For Windows users
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type Run and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier

a Click
, or click Start and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.

Additional printer setup

c Press Enter, or click OK.
3 To select the printer that has changed, do either of the following:
• Press and hold the printer, and then select Printer properties.
• Right‑click the printer, and then select Printer properties (Windows 7 or later) or Properties (earlier versions).
Note: If there is more than one copy of the printer, then update all of them with the new IP address.

4 Click the Ports tab.
5 Select the port from the list, and then click Configure Port.
6 Type the new IP address in the “Printer Name or IP Address” field.
7 Click OK > Close.
For Macintosh users
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Add the printer.
• For IP printing:
a From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
– System Preferences > Print & Scan
– System Preferences > Print & Fax
b Click +.
c Click the IP tab.
d Type the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.
• For AppleTalk printing:
Notes:

Setting up serial printing
Use serial printing to print when the computer is far from the printer or to print at a reduced speed.

Additional printer setup

After installing the serial or communication (COM) port, configure the printer and the computer. Make sure you have
connected the serial cable to the COM port on your printer.

1 Set the parameters in the printer.
a From the printer control panel, navigate to the menu for the port settings.
b Locate the menu for the serial port settings, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.
c Save the modified settings, and then print a menu settings page.
2 Install the printer driver.
a Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
• From the Software CD that came with your printer
• From our Web site:
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system

b Double‑click the software installer package.
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.
If you are using the Software CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the following:

In Windows 8
From the Search charm type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe > OK

In Windows 7 or earlier
1 Click
or click Start, and then click Run.
2 In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
3 Press Enter or click OK.
Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.

c
d
e
f
g

Click Install.
Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Select Advanced, and then click Continue.
From the Configure Printer Connection dialog, select a port.
If the port is not in the list, then click Refresh or navigate to:
Add port > select a port type > enter the necessary information > OK

h Click Continue > Finish.
3 Set the COM port parameters.
After installing the printer driver, set the serial parameters in the COM port assigned to the printer driver.
Note: Make sure the serial parameters in the COM port match the serial parameters you set in the printer.

a Open Device Manager.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type devmgmt.msc > OK

Additional printer setup

In Windows 7 or earlier
1 Click
or click Start, and then click Run.
2 In the Start Search or Run dialog, type devmgmt.msc.
3 Press Enter or click OK.
b Double‑click Ports (COM & LPT) to expand the list of available ports.
c Do either of the following:
• Press and hold the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer (example: COM1).
• Right‑click the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer (example: COM1).
d Click Properties.
e On the Port Settings tab, set the serial parameters to the same serial parameters set in the printer.
Check the serial heading of the menu settings page for the printer settings.

f Click OK, and then close all the dialogs.
g Print a test page to verify printer installation.

Verifying printer setup
When all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set up
correctly by printing the following:

• Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed options
appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed correctly.
Remove the option, and then install it again.

• Network setup page—If your printer has Ethernet or wireless capability and is attached to a network, then print a
network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids
network printing configuration.

Printing a menu settings page
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Menu Settings Page

Printing a network setup page
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page
also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.

1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Network Setup Page

2 Check the first section of the network setup page, and confirm that the status is Connected.
If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning.
Consult a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.

Loading paper and specialty media

Loading paper and specialty media
The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print. For more information,
see “Avoiding jams” on page 256 and “Storing paper” on page 90.

Setting the paper size and type
From the home screen navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a tray > select the paper size or type >

Configuring Universal paper settings
The Universal Paper Size is a user‑defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer
menus.
Notes:

• The smallest supported Universal size is 76.2 x 76.2 mm (3 x 3 inches).
• The largest supported Universal size is 216 x 359.92 mm (8.5 x 14.17 inches).
• When printing on paper less than 210 mm (8.3 inches) wide, the printer prints at a reduced speed to prevent
damage to the fuser.

1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Universal Setup > Units of Measure > select a unit of measure

2 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height.
3 Select the width or height, and then touch Submit.

Loading the 250‑ or 550‑sheet tray
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all
other trays closed until needed.

1 Pull out the tray completely.
Notes:

• When loading folio‑, legal‑, or officio‑sized paper, lift the tray slightly and pull it out.
• Avoid removing trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display. Doing so may cause a jam.

Loading paper and specialty media

2 Squeeze, and then slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper you are loading until it
clicks into place.

Note: Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.

Loading paper and specialty media

3 Unlock the length guide, and then squeeze and slide the guide to the correct position for the size of the paper you
are loading.

Notes:

• Lock the length guide for all paper sizes.
• Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.

Loading paper and specialty media

4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the
edges on a level surface.

5 Load the paper stack with printable side facedown for one‑sided printing.
Note: Make sure the paper or envelope is loaded properly.
One‑sided printing

Two‑sided (duplex) printing

ABC

Loading paper and specialty media

• Do not slide the paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.

• If you are loading envelopes, then make sure that the flap side is facing up and the envelopes are on the left
side of the tray.

Loading paper and specialty media

• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.

Warning—Potential Damage: Overfilling the tray can cause paper jams.

6 For custom‑ or Universal‑size paper, adjust the paper guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack, and then lock
the length guide.

Loading paper and specialty media

7 Insert the tray.

8 From the printer control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in
the tray.
Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.

Loading the 2100‑sheet tray
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all
other trays closed until needed.

1 Pull out the tray completely.
2 Adjust the width and length guides.

Loading paper and specialty media

Loading A5‑size paper
a Pull up and slide the width guide to the position for A5.

1
A5

LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR

LGL C
OF LIO
FO R
LT

b Squeeze, and then slide the length guide to the position for A5 until it clicks into place.

Loading paper and specialty media

c Remove the A5 length guide from its holder.

d Insert the A5 length guide into its designated slot.

Note: Press the A5 length guide until it clicks into place.

Loading A4‑, letter‑, legal‑, oficio‑, and folio‑size paper
a Pull up and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of paper you are loading.

1
LGL C
OF LIO
FO R
LT

A4
A5

LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR

LGL C
OF LIO
FO R
LT

Loading paper and specialty media

b If the A5 length guide is still attached to the length guide, then remove it from its place. If the A5 length guide
is not attached, then proceed to step d.

c Put the A5 length guide in its holder.

Loading paper and specialty media

LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR

d Squeeze, and then slide the length guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.

3 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the
edges on a level surface.

4 Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown for one‑sided printing.
• Make sure the paper is loaded properly.

Loading paper and specialty media

One‑sided printing

Two‑sided (duplex) printing

C
AB

• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.

Warning—Potential Damage: Overfilling the tray can cause paper jams.

5 Insert the tray.
Note: Press the paper stack down while inserting the tray.

Loading paper and specialty media

LGLOFC
FOLIO
LTR

6 From the printer control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in
the tray.
Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.

Loading the multipurpose feeder
1 Pull down the multipurpose feeder door.
Note: Do not load or close the multipurpose feeder while a job is printing.

Loading paper and specialty media

2 Pull the multipurpose feeder extender.

Note: Guide the extender gently so that the multipurpose feeder is fully extended and open.

3 Slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper you are loading.

Note: Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.

Loading paper and specialty media

4 Prepare the paper or specialty media for loading.
• Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten
the edges on a level surface.

• Hold transparencies by the edges, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

Note: Avoid touching the printable side of the transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.

• Flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.

5 Load the paper or specialty media.
Note: Slide the stack gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop.

Loading paper and specialty media

• Load only one size and type of paper or specialty media at a time.
• Make sure the paper fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder, lies flat, and is not bent or wrinkled.
One‑sided (simplex) printing

Two‑sided (duplex) printing

C
AB

• Load envelopes with the flap side down and on the left of the multipurpose feeder.

Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or
self‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.

• Make sure the paper or specialty media is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overfilling the feeder can cause paper jams.

Loading paper and specialty media

6 For custom- or Universal- size paper, adjust the width guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack.
7 From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the
tray.
Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.

Linking and unlinking trays
When the paper size and paper type for any trays are the same, the printer will link those trays. When one linked tray
becomes empty, paper will feed from the next linked tray. We recommended giving all unique paper, such as letterhead
and different colored plain papers, a different custom type name so that the trays they are in will not automatically
link.

Linking and unlinking trays
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu.

Loading paper and specialty media

3 Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking.
• To link trays, make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray.
• To unlink trays, make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray.
4 Click Submit.
Note: You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel. For more information,
see “Setting the paper size and type” on page 66.
Warning—Potential Damage: Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the printer.
The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type. Printing issues may occur if settings are
not properly configured.

Creating a custom name for a paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Names.
3 Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.
4 Click Submit.
5 Click Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Names

2 Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.
3 Touch Submit.
4 Touch Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.

Assigning a custom paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

Loading paper and specialty media

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.
3 Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type.
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.

4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Types

2 Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type.
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.

3 Touch Submit.

Paper and specialty media guide

Paper and specialty media guide
Notes:

•
•
•
•

Make sure the paper size, type, and weight are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel.
Flex, fan, and straighten specialty media before loading it.
The printer may print at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser.
For more information on card stock and labels, see the Card Stock & Label Guide on the Lexmark Web site
http://support.lexmark.com.

Using specialty media
Tips on using card stock
Card stock is heavy, single‑ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness,
and texture, can significantly affect print quality.

• From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the card
stock loaded in the tray.

• Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Specify the paper texture and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.
• Preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper feed
problems.

• Before loading the card stock on the tray, flex and fan the card stock to loosen them. Straighten the edges on a
level surface.

Tips on using envelopes
• From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the
envelopes loaded in the tray.

•
•
•
•
•

Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.
Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers.
For best performance, use envelopes made from 90‑g/m2 (24‑lb) paper or 25% cotton.
Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages.
To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:

–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Have excessive curl or twist.
Are stuck together or damaged in any way.
Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing.
Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars.
Have an interlocking design.
Have postage stamps attached.
Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position.

Paper and specialty media guide

– Have bent corners.
– Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes.
• Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.
• Before loading the envelopes on the tray, flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and
then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.

Tips on using labels
• From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the labels
loaded in the tray.

• Print samples on labels being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• For more information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide at
http://support.lexmark.com.

• Use labels designed specifically for laser printers.
• Do not use labels with slick backing material.
• Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets
also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and toner cartridge
warranties.

• Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.
• Before loading labels on the tray, flex and fan labels to loosen them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

Tips on using letterhead
•
•
•
•

Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers.
Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.
Before loading letterhead, flex and fan the sheets to prevent them from sticking together.
Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead.
Source

Printing

Printable side

Paper orientation

Trays

One‑sided

Facedown

Load the sheet with the
top edge toward the front
of the tray.

Trays

Two‑sided

Faceup

Load the sheet with the
bottom edge entering the
printer first.

Multipurpose feeder

One‑sided

Faceup

Load the sheet with the
top edge entering the
printer first.

Multipurpose feeder

Two‑sided

Facedown

Load the sheet with the
bottom edge entering the
printer first.

Note: Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the preprinted letterhead is acceptable for laser
printers.

Paper and specialty media guide

Tips on using transparencies
• From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the
transparencies loaded in the tray.

•
•
•
•
•

Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers.
Avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies to prevent print quality problems.
Before loading transparencies, flex and fan the sheets to prevent them from sticking together.
When printing on large volumes of transparencies, make sure to print by batches of only up to 20 with an interval
of at least three minutes between batches, to prevent the transparencies from sticking together in the bin. You can
also remove transparencies from the bin by batches of 20.

Paper guidelines
Paper characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these factors before printing on them:

Weight
The printer trays and multipurpose feeder can automatically feed paper weights between 60–176 g/m2 (16–47‑lb) grain
long paper. The 2100‑sheet tray can automatically feed paper weights up to 60–135 g/m2 (16–36‑lb) grain long paper.
Paper lighter than 60 g/m2 (16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, and may cause jams.
Note: Two‑sided printing is supported for 60–176 g/m2 (16–47‑lb) paper.

Curl
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur after
the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid,
cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding
problems.

Smoothness
Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is too
smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points;
smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.

Moisture content
The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that
can degrade its performance.
Store paper in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing. Extend
the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment. Thick
paper may also require a longer conditioning period.

Paper and specialty media guide

Grain direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of
the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.
For 60–176 g/m2 (16–47‑lb) paper, grain long paper is recommended.

Fiber content
Most high‑quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the
paper with a high degree of stability, resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper containing
fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.

Selecting paper
Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble‑free printing.
To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality:

• Always use new, undamaged paper.
• Before loading paper, know the recommended printable side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on
the paper package.

• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
• Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same tray; mixing results in jams.
• Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.

Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead
•
•
•
•

Use grain long for 60–90‑g/m2 (16–24‑lb) paper.
Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation‑set or oil‑based generally meet these
requirements; latex inks might not.

• Print samples on preprinted forms and letterheads considered for use before buying large quantities. This
determines whether or not the ink in the preprinted form or letterhead will affect print quality.

• When in doubt, contact your paper supplier.

Using recycled paper and other office papers
As an environmentally conscientious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled paper produced specifically for
use in laser (electrophotographic) printers.
While no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well, Lexmark consistently tests papers that
represent recycled cut size copier papers available on the global market. This scientific testing is conducted with rigor
and discipline. Many factors are taken into consideration both separately and as a whole, including the following:

•
•
•
•

Amount of post-consumer waste (Lexmark tests up to 100% post-consumer waste content.)
Temperature and humidity conditions (Testing chambers simulate climates from all over the world.)
Moisture content (Business papers should have low moisture: 4–5%.)
Bending resistance and proper stiffness means optimum feeding through the printer.

Paper and specialty media guide

•
•
•
•

Thickness (impacts how much can be loaded into a tray)
Surface roughness (measured in Sheffield units, impacts print clarity and how well toner fuses to the paper)
Surface friction (determines how easily sheets can be separated)
Grain and formation (impacts curling, which also influences the mechanics of how the paper behaves as it moves
through the printer)

• Brightness and texture (look and feel)
Recycled papers are better than ever; however, the amount of recycled content in a paper affects the degree of control
over foreign matter. And while recycled papers are one good path to printing in an environmentally responsible manner,
they are not perfect. The energy required to de-ink and deal with additives such as colorants and “glue” often generates
more carbon emissions than does normal paper production. However, using recycled papers enables better resource
management overall.
Lexmark concerns itself with the responsible use of paper in general based on life cycle assessments of its products. To
gain a better understanding of the impact of printers on the environment, the company commissioned a number of
life cycle assessments and found that paper was identified as the primary contributor (up to 80%) of carbon emissions
caused throughout the entire life of a device (from design to end-of-life). This is due to the energy-intensive
manufacturing processes required to make paper.
Thus, Lexmark seeks to educate customers and partners on minimizing the impact of paper. Using recycled paper is
one way. Eliminating excessive and unnecessary paper consumption is another. Lexmark is well-equipped to help
customers minimize printing and copying waste. In addition, the company encourages purchasing paper from suppliers
who demonstrate their commitment to sustainable forestry practices.
Lexmark does not endorse specific suppliers, although a converter’s product list for special applications is maintained.
However, the following paper choice guidelines will help alleviate the environmental impact of printing:

1 Minimize paper consumption.
2 Be selective about the origin of wood fiber. Buy from suppliers who carry certifications such as the Forestry
Stewardship Council (FSC) or The Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification (PEFC). These certifications
guarantee that the paper manufacturer uses wood pulp from forestry operators that employ environmentally and
socially responsible forest management and restoration practices.

3 Choose the most appropriate paper for printing needs: normal 75 or 80 g/m2 certified paper, lower weight paper,
or recycled paper.

Unacceptable paper examples
Test results indicate that the following paper types are at risk for use with laser printers:

•
•
•
•

Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers

•
•
•
•
•

Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers

Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise location on the page) greater than ± 2.3 mm (± 0.9 in.),
such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms. In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software
application to successfully print on these forms.)
Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers
Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European testing)
Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)
Multiple part forms or documents

Paper and specialty media guide

For more information about Lexmark, visit www.lexmark.com. General sustainability-related information can be found
at the Environmental Sustainability link.

Storing paper
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:

• For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40 percent. Most
label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18–24°C (65–75°F) with relative humidity
between 40 and 60 percent.

•
•
•
•

Store paper in cartons, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
Store individual packages on a flat surface.
Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer. The carton and wrapper
help keep the paper clean, dry, and flat.

Supported paper sizes, types, and weights
The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper sources and the types of paper they support.
Note: For an unlisted paper size, select the closest larger listed size.

Paper sizes supported by the printer
Paper size1

Dimensions

210 x 297 mm
(8.3 x 11.7 in.)

148 x 210 mm
(5.8 x 8.3 in.)

105 x 148 mm
(4.1 x 5.8 in.)

JIS B5

182 x 257 mm
(7.2 x 10.1 in.)

Letter

216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 in.)

Standard or
optional 250‑
or 550‑sheet
tray

2100‑sheet tray Multipurpose
feeder

Duplex

ADF

Scanner
glass

If your preferred default paper size cannot be set in the printer control panel, then you may select common paper sizes
that correspond to the position of the length guide in the tray from the Paper Size/Type menu. If the paper size is not
available, then select Universal or turn off tray size sensing. For more information, contact customer support.
2

Paper is supported in long‑edge orientation.

3 Universal is supported in duplex mode only if the width is from 105 mm (4.13 in.) to 216 mm (8.5 in.), and the length is
from 148 mm (5.83 in.) to 356 mm (14 in.).
4 When printing on paper less than 210 mm (8.3 in.) wide, the printer prints at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the
fuser.

Paper and specialty media guide

Paper size1

Dimensions

Legal

216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)

Executive

184 x 267 mm
(7.3 x 10.5 in.)

Oficio (México)

216 x 340 mm
(8.5 x 13.4 in.)

Folio

216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 in.)

Statement

140 x 216 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)

Universal3, 4

105 x 216 mm to
216 x 356 mm
(4.13 x 8.5 in. to
8.5 x 14 in.)

7 3/4 Envelope
(Monarch)

98 x 191 mm
(3.9 x 7.5 in.)

9 Envelope

98 x 225 mm
(3.9 x 8.9 in.)

10 Envelope

105 x 241 mm
(4.1 x 9.5 in.)

DL Envelope

110 x 220 mm
(4.3 x 8.7 in.)

C5 Envelope

162 x 229 mm
(6.38 x 9.01 in.)

B5 Envelope

176 x 250 mm
(6.93 x 9.84 in.)

Other Envelope

98 x 162 mm
(3.9 x 6.4 in.) to
176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)

Standard or
optional 250‑
or 550‑sheet
tray

2100‑sheet tray Multipurpose
feeder

Duplex

ADF

Scanner
glass

Paper is supported in long‑edge orientation.

Universal is supported in duplex mode only if the width is from 105 mm (4.13 in.) to 216 mm (8.5 in.), and the length is
from 148 mm (5.83 in.) to 356 mm (14 in.).
4

When printing on paper less than 210 mm (8.3 in.) wide, the printer prints at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the
fuser.

Paper and specialty media guide

Paper types and weights supported by the printer
The printer engine supports 60–176‑g/m2 (16–47‑lb) paper weights.
Note: Labels, transparencies, envelopes, and card stock always print at reduced speed.
Paper type

250‑ or
2100‑sheet
550‑sheet tray tray

Multipurpose
feeder

Duplex

ADF

Scanner glass

Paper
Card Stock

Plain Envelope

Rough Envelope

Paper Labels

Pharmacy Labels

Transparencies*

Print transparencies in batches of only up to 20 to prevent them from sticking together. For more information, see “Tips
on using transparencies” on page 87.

Printing

Printing
Printing forms and a document
Printing forms
Use the Forms and Favorites application to quickly and easily access frequently used forms or other information that
is regularly printed. Before you can use this application, first set it up on the printer. For more information, see “Setting
up Forms and Favorites” on page 23.

1 From the printer home screen, navigate to:
Forms and Favorites > select the form from the list > enter the number of copies > adjust other settings

2 Depending on your printer model, touch

, or Submit.

Printing a document
1 From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded.
2 Send the print job:
For Windows users
a With a document open, click File > Print.
b Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
c Adjust the settings, if necessary.
d Click OK > Print.
For Macintosh users
a Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog:
1 With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.
2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the paper loaded.
3 Click OK.
b Customize the settings in the Print dialog:
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.

2 From the Print dialog and pop‑up menus, adjust the settings if necessary.
Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded, or
select the appropriate tray or feeder.
3 Click Print.

Adjusting toner darkness
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Printing

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.
3 Adjust the toner darkness, and then click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness

2 Adjust the setting, and then touch Submit.

Printing from a mobile device
For the list of supported mobile devices and to download a compatible mobile printing application, visit
http://lexmark.com/mobile.
Note: Mobile printing applications may also be available from your mobile device manufacturer.

Printing

Printing from a flash drive
Printing from a flash drive
Notes:

• Before printing an encrypted PDF file, you will be prompted to type the file password from the printer control
panel.

• You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.
1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port.

Notes:

• A flash drive icon appears on the printer home screen when a flash drive is inserted.
• If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the
printer ignores the flash drive.

• If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears on the printer
display. After these print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents
from the flash drive.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any wireless network adapter, any connector, the
memory device, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory
device. Loss of data can occur.

Printing

2 From the printer control panel, touch the document you want to print.
3 Touch the arrows to get a preview of the document.
4 Use

to specify the number of copies to be printed, and then touch Print.

Notes:

• Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.
• If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then touch Held Jobs on
the home screen to print files from the flash drive.

Supported flash drives and file types
Notes:

• High‑speed USB flash drives must support the full‑speed standard. Low-speed USB devices are not supported.
• USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table (FAT) system. Devices formatted with New Technology
File System (NTFS) or any other file system are not supported.

Printing

Recommended flash drives

File type

• Lexar JumpDrive FireFly (512MB and 1GB)
• SanDisk Cruzer Micro (512MB and 1GB)
• Sony Micro Vault Classic (512MB and 1GB)

Documents:

• .pdf
• .xps
Images:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

.dcx
.gif
.jpeg or .jpg
.bmp
.pcx
.tiff or .tif
.png
.fls

Printing confidential and other held jobs
Storing print jobs in the printer
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Security > Confidential Print > select the print job type
Use

Max Invalid PIN

Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Note: When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN
are deleted.

Confidential Job Expiration

Hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer control
panel.
Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the
numbers 1–9.

Repeat Job Expiration

Print and store print jobs in the printer memory.

Verify Job Expiration

Print one copy of a print job and hold the remaining copies. It allows you to
examine if the first copy is satisfactory. The print job is automatically deleted
from the printer memory when all copies are printed.

Reserve Job Expiration

Store print jobs for printing at a later time.
Note: The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu.

Notes:

• Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.

• You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer
control panel.

• All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.

Printing

2 Touch Submit.

Printing confidential and other held jobs
Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing. Repeat and Reserve
jobs are held in the printer until you delete them.

For Windows users
1 With a document open, click File > Print.
2 Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3 Click Print and Hold.
4 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.

5 Click OK or Print.
6 From the printer home screen, release the print job.
• For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print

• For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print

For Macintosh users
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.

2 From the print options or Copies & Pages pop‑up menu, choose Job Routing.
3 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.

4 Click OK or Print.
5 From the printer home screen, release the print job.
• For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print

• For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print

Modifying confidential print settings
Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

Printing

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Configuration > Other Settings tab > Security > Confidential Print Setup.
3 Modify the settings:
• Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts. When a user exceeds that number, all of the jobs for that user
are deleted.

• Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs. When a user has not printed the jobs within that time, all of
the jobs for that user are deleted.

4 Save the modified settings.

Printing information pages
Printing a font sample list
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Fonts

2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.

Printing a directory list
A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or in the printer hard disk.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Directory

Canceling a print job
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel
1 From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Jobs or press

on the keypad.

2 Touch the print job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.

Canceling a print job from the computer
For Windows users
1 Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK

Printing

In Windows 7 or earlier

a Click
or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
2 Double‑click the printer icon.
3 Select the print job you want to cancel.
4 Click Delete.

For Macintosh users
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
• System Preferences > Print & Scan > select your printer > Open Print Queue
• System Preferences > Print & Fax > select your printer > Open Print Queue
2 From the printer window, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.

100

Copying

101

Copying
Scanner glass

Automatic document feeder (ADF)

Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including
two-sided (duplex) pages.

Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages,
small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

Making copies
Making a quick copy
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure the size of the original document and the size of the copy paper are
the same.

3 From the printer control panel, press

Copying using the ADF
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

Copying

102

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 Adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > specify the copy settings > Copy It

Copying using the scanner glass
1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > specify the copy settings > Copy It
If you have more pages to scan, then place the next document on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the next
page.

3 Touch Finish the Job.

Copying photos
1 Place a photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content > Photo >

3 From the Content Source menu, navigate to:
Photo/Film >

> Copy It

Note: If you have more photos to copy, then place the next photo on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the
next page.

4 Touch Finish the Job.

Copying on specialty media
Copying on transparencies
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >

Copying

103

3 Navigate to:
Copy to > select the tray that contains transparencies > Copy It
If there are no trays that contain transparencies, then navigate to:
Manual Feeder >

> select the size of the transparencies >

> Transparency >

4 Load transparencies into the multipurpose feeder, and then touch Copy It.

Copying on letterhead
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

4 Navigate to:
Copy to > select the tray containing the letterhead > Copy It

5 If there are no trays that support letterhead, then navigate to:
Manual Feeder > select the size of the letterhead > Letterhead

6 Load the letterhead faceup, top edge first into the multipurpose feeder, and then touch Copy It.

Creating a copy shortcut using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, touch Copy.
2 Adjust the copy settings, and then touch Save as Shortcut.
Note: If you change the settings after the copy shortcut has been created, then the settings are not saved.

3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
4 Verify that the shortcut name is correct, and then touch OK.
If the shortcut name is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Notes:

• The shortcut name appears in the Copy Shortcuts icon on the printer home screen.
• You can use the shortcut when copying another document using the same settings.

Copying

104

Customizing copy settings
Copying to a different size
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

4 Navigate to:
Copy to > select a new size for the copy >

> Copy It

Making copies using paper from a selected tray
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

4 Navigate to:
Copy to > select the tray containing the paper type you want to use >

5 Touch Copy It.

Copying different paper sizes
Use the ADF to copy original documents with different paper sizes. Depending on the paper sizes loaded and the “Copy
to” and “Copy from” settings, each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes (Example 1) or scaled to fit a single paper
size (Example 2).

Example 1: Copying on mixed paper sizes
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Copying

105

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

4 Navigate to:
Copy to > Auto Size Match >

> Copy It

The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned. Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes
corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document.

Example 2: Copying on a single paper size
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

4 Navigate to:
Copy to > Letter >

> Copy It

The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned, and then scales the mixed paper sizes to fit on
the paper size selected.

Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

Copying

106

3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Sides (Duplex) > select the preferred duplexing method
Note: For the preferred duplexing method, the first number represents sides of the original documents while
the second number represents sides of the copy. For example, select “2 sided to 2 sided” if you have two-sided
original documents and you want two‑sided copies.

4 Touch

> Copy It.

Reducing or enlarging copies
Copies can be scaled from 25% to 400% of the original document size.

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, touch Copy.
4 From the Scale area, touch

to decrease or increase the value by 1%.

Touching “Copy to” or “Copy from” after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. This automatically adjusts the scan image of the original document to
fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.

5 Touch Copy It.

Adjusting copy quality
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

4 Touch the button that best represents the content type of the document you are copying.
• Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.

Copying

107

5 Touch

6 Touch the button that best represents the content source of the document you are copying.
• Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
• Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
• Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from a film.
• Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
• Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
7 Touch

> Copy It.

Collating copies
If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print the copies as a set (collated) or to print the
copies as groups of pages (not collated).
Collated

Not collated

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > enter the number of copies > Collate > select the preferred order of pages >

> Copy It

Placing separator sheets between copies
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

Copying

108

3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Separator Sheets
Note: Set Collate to “1,2,3 ‑ 1,2,3” to place separator sheets between copies. If Collate is set to “1,1,1 ‑ 2,2,2,”
then the separator sheets are added to the end of the copy job. For more information, see “Collating copies” on
page 107.

4 Select one of the following:
• Between Copies
• Between Jobs
• Between Pages
• Off
5 Touch

> Copy It.

Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet
In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto a single
sheet of paper.
Notes:

• Make sure to set the paper size to letter, legal, A4, or JIS B5.
• Make sure to set the copy size to 100%.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

> Copy It

Note: If Paper Saver is set to Off, then the Print Page Borders option is unavailable.

Creating a custom copy job
The custom copy job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job. Each
set may be scanned using different job parameters. When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled, the
scanner scans the first set of original documents using the specified settings, and then it scans the next set with the
same or different settings.
The definition of a set depends on the scan source:

• If you scan a document on the scanner glass, then a set consists of one page.
• If you scan multiple pages using the ADF, then a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF tray becomes empty.
• If you scan one page using the ADF, then a set consists of one page.

Copying

109

For example:

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

> Copy It

Note: When the end of a set is reached, the scan screen appears.

4 Load the next document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass, and then touch
Scan from automatic feeder or Scan from flatbed.
Note: Change the scan job settings, if necessary.

5 If you have another document to scan, then repeat the previous step. Otherwise, touch Finish the job.

Placing information on copies
Placing a header or footer on pages
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Header/Footer > select where you want to place the header or footer > select the type
of header or footer you want

4 Enter the required information depending on the header or footer you selected, and then touch Done.
5 Touch

, and then press

Placing an overlay message on each page
An overlay message can be placed on each page. The message choices are Urgent, Confidential, Copy, Custom, and
Draft.

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Copying

110

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

Canceling a copy job
Canceling a copy job while the original document is in the ADF
When the ADF begins processing a document, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel.

Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass
From the home screen, touch Cancel Job.
Canceling appears on the display. When the job is canceled, the Copy screen appears.

Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed
1 From the home screen, touch Cancel Job, or press

on the keypad.

2 Touch the job you want to cancel.
3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.

Understanding the copy options
Copy from
This option opens a screen where you can select the paper size of the original document.

• Touch the paper size that matches the original document.
• To copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes with the same width, touch Mixed Sizes.
• To set the printer to automatically detect the size of the original document, touch Auto Size Sense.

Copy to
This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size and type on which your copies will be printed.

• Touch the paper size and type that matches the paper loaded.
• If the settings for “Copy from” and “Copy to” are different, then the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting
to accommodate the difference.

Copying

111

• If the paper type or size that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays, then touch Manual Feeder,
and manually load the paper in the multipurpose feeder.

• When “Copy to” is set to Auto Size Match, each copy matches the paper size of the original document. If a matching
paper size is not in one of the trays, then Paper size not found appears and prompts to load a paper in a
tray or multipurpose feeder.

Scale
This option lets you scale the document from 25% to 400% of the original document size. You can also set automatic
scaling.

• When copying to a different paper size, such as from legal‑size to letter‑size paper, set the “Copy from” and “Copy
to” paper sizes automatically to scale the scan image to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.

• To decrease or increase the value by 1%, touch

or
on the printer control panel. To make a continuous
decrease or increase in value, hold the button for two seconds or more.

Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the copies are in relation to the original document.

Sides (Duplex)
This option lets you make one- or two-sided copies from one- or two-sided original documents.

Collate
This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document.

Copies
This option lets you set the number of copies to be printed.

Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Select from the following content types:

•
•
•
•

Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.

Select from the following content sources:

•
•
•
•

Copying

•
•
•
•

112

Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.

Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings by assigning a shortcut name.
Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.

Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:

• Advanced Duplex—This specifies the document orientation, whether documents are one-sided or two-sided, and
how documents are bound.

• Advanced Imaging—This changes or adjusts Auto Center, Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout,
Contrast, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings
before you copy the document.

• Create Booklet—This creates a booklet. You can choose between one‑sided and two‑sided.
Note: This option appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.

• Cover Page Setup—This sets up the cover page of copies and booklets.
• Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
• Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal
area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area
selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.

• Header/Footer—This inserts date or time, page number, Bates number, or custom text, and then prints them in
the specified header or footer location.

• Margin Shift—This increases or reduces the size of the margin of a page by shifting the scanned image. Touch
or

to set the margin you want. If the additional margin is too large, then the copy will be cropped.

• Overlay—This creates a watermark (or message) that overlays the content of your copy. You can choose from
Urgent, Confidential, Copy, and Draft, or you can enter a custom message in the ”Enter custom text” field. The word
you pick will appear, faintly, in large print across each page.

• Paper Saver—This prints two or more pages of an original document on the same page. Paper Saver is also called
N-up printing where N stands for the number of pages. For example, 2-up would print two pages of your document
on a single page, and 4-up would print four pages of your document on a single page.

• Separator Sheets—This places a blank sheet of paper between copies, pages, or print jobs. The separator sheets
can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are
printed on.

• Multifeed Sensor—This detects when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at a time, and then displays an
error message.
Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.

E-mailing

113

E-mailing
Scanner glass

Automatic document feeder (ADF)

Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including
two-sided (duplex) pages.

Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages,
small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

Setting up the printer to e-mail
Setting up the e-mail function
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.
3 Enter the appropriate information, and then click Submit.

Configuring e‑mail settings
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

E-mailing

114

Creating an e-mail shortcut
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings.
3 From the Other Settings column, click Manage Shortcuts > E-mail Shortcut Setup.
4 Type a unique name for the e‑mail recipient, and then type the e‑mail address. If you are entering multiple addresses,
then separate each address with a comma.

5 Click Add.

Creating an e-mail shortcut using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient > type an e‑mail address
To create a group of recipients, touch Next address, and then type the next recipient’s e-mail address.

2 Touch Subject, then type the e‑mail subject, and then touch Done.
3 Touch Message, then type your message, and then touch Done.
4 Adjust the e‑mail settings.
Note: If you change the settings after the e‑mail shortcut has been created, then the settings are not saved.

5 Touch

6 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
7 Verify that the shortcut name is correct, and then touch OK.
If the shortcut name is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Notes:

• The shortcut name appears in the E-mail Shortcuts icon on the printer home screen.
• You can use the shortcut when e‑mailing another document using the same settings.

E-mailing

115

E-mailing a document
You can use the printer to e‑mail scanned documents to one or more recipients in a number of ways. You can type the
e‑mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book. You can also use the Multi Send or MyShortcut
application from the printer home screen. For more information, see the "Activating the home screen applications"
section.

Sending an e-mail using the printer control panel
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure that the size of the original document and the copy paper size are
the same.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s)

4 Type the e‑mail address, or press # using the keypad, and then enter the shortcut number.
Notes:

• To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want
to add.

• You can also enter an e‑mail address using the address book.
5 Touch Done > Send It.

Sending an e‑mail using a shortcut number
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press #, then enter the shortcut number using the keypad, and then touch

Note: To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number that
you want to add.

4 Touch Send It.

E-mailing

116

Sending an e‑mail using the address book
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

> type the name of the recipient > Search

4 Touch the name of the recipient.
Note: To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number that
you want to add, or search the address book.

5 Touch Done.

Customizing e-mail settings
Adding e-mail subject and message information
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

4 Touch Subject, then type the e‑mail subject, and then touch Done.
5 Touch Message, then type your message, and then touch Done.

Changing the output file type
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

E-mailing

117

3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e‑mail address > Done > Send as

4 Touch the button that represents the file type you want to send.
• PDF—Create a single file with multiple pages.
• Secure PDF—Create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.
• TIFF—Create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.

• JPEG—Create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web
browsers and graphics programs.

• XPS—Create a single XML Paper Specification (XPS) file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet
Explorer‑hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third‑party standalone viewer.

5 Touch

> Send It.

Note: If you selected Secure PDF, then you will be prompted to enter your password twice.

Canceling an e-mail
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears, or while Scan the Next Page /
Finish the Job appears.

Understanding the e-mail options
Recipient(s)
This option lets you enter the recipient of your e-mail. You may enter multiple e‑mail addresses.

Subject
This option lets you type a subject line for your e-mail.

Message
This option lets you type a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.

File Name
This option lets you customize the attachment file name.

Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a shortcut name.
Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.

E-mailing

118

Original Size
This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to e‑mail. When Original Size is set to Mixed
Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter‑ and legal‑size pages).

Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark your scanned documents are in relation to the original document.

Resolution
This option lets you adjust the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-mail file
size and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.

Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Select from the following content types:

•
•
•
•

Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.

Select from the following content sources:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.

Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
Select one of the following:

• PDF—Use this to create a single file with multiple pages.
Note: PDF is the factory default setting.

• Secure PDF—Use this to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.
• TIFF—Use this to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the
Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.

• JPEG—Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document.
• XPS—Use this to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.

E-mailing

119

Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:

• Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the paper.
This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.

• Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and
Binding settings to match the orientation.

• Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.

Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned,
the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.

Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:

• Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality,
Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you
e‑mail the document.

• Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
• Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal
area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area
selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.

• Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
• Multifeed Sensor—This detects when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at a time, and then displays an
error message.
Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.

Faxing

120

Faxing
Scanner glass

Automatic document feeder (ADF)

Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including
two-sided (duplex) pages.

Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages,
small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

Setting up the printer to fax
The following connection methods may not be applicable in all countries or regions.
Note: During the initial printer setup, deselect Fax and any other function you plan to set up later, and then touch
Continue. The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled and not fully set up.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or
receiving a fax.

Faxing

121

Initial fax setup
Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top or bottom
of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission: fax name (identification of the business, other entity,
or individual sending the message) and fax number (telephone number of the sending fax machine, business, other
entity, or individual). For more information, see “Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment” on
page 344.
To enter your fax setup information, use the printer control panel, or use your browser to access the Embedded Web
Server and then enter the Settings menu.
Note: If you do not have a TCP/IP environment, then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax setup
information.

Using the printer control panel for fax setup
When the printer is turned on for the first time, a series of start‑up screens appear. If the printer has fax capabilities,
then the Fax Name and Fax Number screens appear.

1 When the Fax Name screen appears, do the following:
a Enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
b Enter the fax name, and then touch Submit.
2 When the Fax Number screen appears, enter the fax number, and then touch Submit.

Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3 In the Fax Name field, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
4 In the Fax Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5 Click Submit.

Faxing

122

Choosing a fax connection
Scenario 1: Standard telephone line
Setup 1: Printer is connected to a dedicated fax line

To connect:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.

port of the printer.

Faxing

123

Tips for this setup:

• You can set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On) or manually (Auto Answer Off).
• If you want to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On), then set the printer to pick up on any number of rings
that you want.

Setup 2: Printer is sharing the line with an answering machine
Connected to the same telephone wall jack

PHONE

LINE

To connect:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
3 Connect the answering machine to the

port of the printer.

Faxing

124

Connected to different wall jacks

PHONE

LINE

To connect:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the

port of the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
Tips for this setup:

• If you have only one telephone number on your line, then you need to set the printer to receive faxes automatically
(Auto Answer On).

• Set the printer to pick up calls two rings after the answering machine. For example, if the answering machine picks
up calls after four rings, then set the printer to pick up after six rings. This way, the answering machine picks up
calls first and your voice calls are received. If the call is a fax, then the printer detects the fax signal on the line and
takes over the call.

• If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service provided by your telephone company, then make sure that you set the
correct ring pattern for the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you have set it to receive
faxes automatically.

Faxing

125

Setup 3: Printer is sharing the line with a telephone subscribed to voice mail service

To connect:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the

port of the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
3 Connect the telephone to the

port of the printer.

Tips for this setup:

• This setup works best if you subscribe to a distinctive ring service. If you have distinctive ring service, then make
sure that you set the correct ring pattern for the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you
have set it to receive faxes automatically.

• If you have only one telephone number on your line, then you need to set the printer to receive faxes manually
(Auto Answer Off).
When you answer the telephone and you hear fax tones, press *9* or the manual answer code on the telephone
to receive the fax.

Faxing

126

• You can also set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On), but you need to turn off the voice
mail service when you are expecting a fax. This setting works best if you are using voice mail more often than fax.

Scenario 2: Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)

A Digital Subscriber Line splits your regular telephone line into two channels: voice and Internet. Telephone and fax
signals travel through the voice channel, and Internet signals pass through the other channel. This way, you can use
the same line for analog voice calls (including faxes) and digital Internet access.
To minimize interference between the two channels and ensure a quality connection, you need to install a DSL filter
for the analog devices (fax machine, telephone, answering machine) in your network. Interference causes noise and
static on the telephone, failed and poor quality faxes for the printer, and slow Internet connection on your computer.
To install a filter for the printer:

1 Connect the line port of the DSL filter to the wall jack.
2 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the
end to the phone port on the DSL filter.

port of the printer. Connect the other

Faxing

127

3 To continue using a computer for Internet access, connect the computer to the DSL HPN port on the DSL filter.
4 To connect a telephone to the printer, remove any installed adapter plug from the

port of the printer, and then

connect the telephone to the port.

Scenario 3: VoIP telephone service

To connect:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the

port of the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the VoIP adapter.
Note: The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active. VoIP providers may charge additional cost
for activation of the second phone port.

3 Connect the telephone to the

port of the printer.

Faxing

128

Tips for this setup:

• To make sure that the phone port on the VoIP adapter is active, plug an analog telephone into the phone port, and
then listen for a dial tone. If you hear a dial tone, then the port is active.

• If you need two phone ports for your devices, but do not want to pay additional cost, then do not plug the printer
into the second phone port. You can use a phone splitter. Plug the phone splitter into the port labeled Phone Line
1 or Phone Port, and then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter.
Note: Make sure you use a phone splitter, not a line splitter. To make sure that you are using the correct
splitter, plug an analog telephone into the splitter and then listen for a dial tone.

Scenario 4: Digital telephone service through a cable provider
Setup 1: Printer is connected directly to a cable modem

Faxing

129

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the

port of the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the cable modem.
Note: The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active. VoIP providers may charge additional cost
for activation of the second phone port.

3 Connect your analog telephone phone to the

port of the printer.

Notes:

• To make sure that the telephone port on the cable modem is active, plug an analog telephone into the
telephone port, and then listen for a dial tone. If you hear a dial tone, then the port is active.

• If you need two telephone ports for your devices, but do not want to pay additional cost, then do not plug the
printer into the second telephone port. You can use a phone splitter. Plug the phone splitter into the Phone Line
1 or Phone Port, and then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter.

• Make sure you use a phone splitter, not a line splitter. To make sure that you are using the correct splitter, plug
an analog telephone into the splitter and then listen for a dial tone.

Setup 2: Printer is connected to a wall jack; cable modem is installed elsewhere in the facility

Faxing

130

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the

port of the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
3 Connect your analog telephone to the

port of the printer.

Scenario 5: Countries or regions with different telephone wall jacks and plugs
Some countries or regions may have different types of telephone wall jack connectors than those that came with the
printer. The standard wall jack adopted by most countries or regions is RJ-11. Your printer comes with the RJ-11 jack
and a telephone cable with the RJ-11 plug.
If the wall jack or equipment in your facility is not compatible with this type of connection, then you need to use a
telephone adapter. An adapter for your country or region may not come with your printer, and you may need to
purchase it separately.

There may be an adapter plug installed in the
port of the printer. If you are using a telephone adapter or a facility
port of the printer.
that has a cascaded or serial wiring scheme, then do not remove the adapter plug from the

Part name

Part number

Lexmark adapter plug

40X8519

Faxing

131

Connecting the printer to a non‑RJ‑11 wall jack

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with printer to the

port of the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ‑11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to the wall jack.
3 If you want to connect another device (telephone or answering machine) to the same wall jack, and if the device
has a non‑RJ‑11 connector, then connect it directly to the telephone adapter.
Notes:

• The
the

port of the printer may have an adapter plug for use with the adapter. Do not remove the plug from
port of the printer.

• In some countries or regions, the printer may not come with a telephone adapter or an adapter plug.

Faxing

132

Connecting the printer to a wall jack in Germany
The German wall jack has two kinds of ports. The N ports are for fax machines, modems, and answering machines. The
F port is for telephones.

N F N

Faxing

133

Connect the printer to any of the N ports.

N F N

PHONE

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came the printer to the

LINE

port of the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the RJ‑11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to an N port.
3 If you want to connect a telephone and answering machine to the same wall jack, then connect the devices as
shown.
Note: Do not remove the adapter plug from the
telephone system.

port of the printer if you are connecting to a serial or cascaded

Faxing

134

Connecting to a distinctive ring service
A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone company. This service lets you have multiple telephone
numbers on one telephone line, with each telephone number having a different ring pattern. This may be useful for
distinguishing between fax and voice calls. If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then follow these steps to
connect the equipment:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.

3 Change the distinctive rings setting to match the setting you want for the printer to answer.
Note: The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On. This sets the printer to answer single, double, and
triple ring patterns.

a From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Answer On

b Select the pattern setting you want to change, and then touch Submit.

Setting the outgoing fax name and number
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

Faxing

135

Setting the date and time
You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3 In the Manually Set Date & Time field, enter the current date and time.
4 Click Submit.
Note: It is recommended to use the network time.

Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time
The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time:

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3 Select the Automatically Observe DST check box, and then enter the DST start and end dates in the Custom Time
Zone Setup section.

4 Click Submit.

Sending a fax
You can use the printer to send a fax to one or more recipients in a number of ways. You can type the e‑mail address,
use a shortcut number, or use the address book. You can also use the Multi Send or MyShortcut application from the
printer home screen. For more information, see the "Activating the home screen applications" section of the User’s
Guide.

Sending a fax using the printer control panel
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

Faxing

136

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, touch Fax.
4 Enter the fax number or a shortcut.
Note: To add recipients, touch Next number, and then enter the recipient's telephone number or shortcut
number, or search the address book.

5 Touch Fax It.

Sending a fax using the computer
The printer driver fax option lets you send a print job to the printer, which sends the job as a fax. The fax option works
as a normal fax machine, but is controlled through the printer driver instead of the printer control panel.

1 With a document open, click File > Print.
2 Select the printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3 Navigate to:
Fax tab > Enable fax

4 Enter the recipient fax number or numbers in the “Fax number(s)” field.
Note: Fax numbers can be entered manually or by using the Phone Book feature

5 If necessary, enter a prefix in the “Dialing prefix” field.
6 Select the appropriate paper size and page orientation.
7 If you want to include a cover page with the fax, then select Include cover page with fax, and then enter the
appropriate information.

8 Click OK.
Notes:

• The Fax option is available for use only with the PostScript driver or the Universal Fax Driver. For information on
installing these drivers, see the Software CD.

• The Fax option must be configured and enabled in the PostScript driver under the Configuration tab before it
can be used.

• If the Always display settings prior to faxing check box is selected, then you are prompted to verify the
recipient information before the fax is sent. If this check box is cleared, then the queued document is sent
automatically as a fax when you click OK on the Fax tab.

Sending a fax using a shortcut number
Fax shortcuts are like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or a fax machine. A shortcut number (1–999) can contain
a single recipient or multiple recipients.

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Faxing

137

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
4 Touch Fax It.

Sending a fax using the address book
The address book lets you search for bookmarks and network directory servers. For more information on enabling the
address book feature, contact your system support person.

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax >

> type the name of the recipient > Search

Note: You can search only for one name at a time.

4 Touch the name of the recipient, and then touch Fax It.

Sending a fax at a scheduled time
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options > Delayed Send
Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, then the Delayed Send button does not appear. Faxes waiting for
transmission are listed in the fax queue.

Faxing

138

4 Specify the time the fax will be transmitted, and then touch

5 Touch Fax It.
Note: The document is scanned, and then faxed at the scheduled time.

Creating shortcuts
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
Assign a shortcut number to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Manage Shortcuts > Fax Shortcut Setup.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system support
person.

3 Type a name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.
Notes:

• To create a multiple‑number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.
• Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).
4 Assign a shortcut number.
Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.

5 Click Add.

Creating a fax destination shortcut using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the fax number.
Note: To create a group of fax numbers, touch Next number, and then enter the next fax number.

2 Touch

3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
4 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
Note: If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.

Faxing

139

Customizing fax settings
Changing the fax resolution
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

4 From the Resolution area, touch the arrows to select the resolution you want.
Note: Select a resolution from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra Fine (best quality at a reduced speed).

5 Touch Fax It.

Making a fax lighter or darker
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

4 Adjust the fax darkness, and then touch Fax It.

Viewing a fax log
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Reports.
3 Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.

Faxing

140

Blocking junk faxes
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Block No Name Fax.
Notes:

• This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or have no fax name.
• In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or type the fax names of specific fax callers you want
to block.

Canceling an outgoing fax
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanning appears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanning appears or while
Scan the Next Page and Finish the Job appear.

Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory
1 On the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs.
The Cancel Jobs screen appears.

2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel.
Only three jobs appear on the screen; touch the down arrow until the job you want appears, and then touch the
job you want to cancel.

3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.
The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears, the selected jobs are deleted, and then the home screen appears.

Holding and forwarding faxes
Holding faxes
This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released manually or
at a scheduled day or time.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Faxing

141

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Holding Faxes.
3 From the Held Fax Mode menu, select one of the following:
• Off
• Always On
• Manual
• Scheduled
4 If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps:
a Click Fax Holding Schedule.
b From the Action menu, select Hold faxes.
c From the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.
d From the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.
5 Click Add.

Forwarding a fax
This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e‑mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings.
3 From the Fax Forwarding menu, select Print, Print and Forward, or Forward.
4 From the “Forward to” menu, select Fax, E‑mail, FTP, LDSS, or eSF.
5 In the “Forward to Shortcut” field, enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.
Note: The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the “Forward to” menu.

6 Click Submit.

Understanding the fax options
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.

Faxing

142

Select from the following content types:

•
•
•
•

Select from the following content sources:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Resolution
This option lets you adjust the quality of the fax output. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the
time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.
Select one of the following:

•
•
•
•

Standard—Use this when faxing most documents.
Fine 200 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with small prints.
Super fine 300 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with fine details.
Ultra fine 600 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with pictures or photos.

Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the faxes are in relation to the original document.

Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:

• Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on one side or on both sides of the page (duplex).
This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.

• Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and
Binding settings to match the orientation.

• Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.

Faxing

143

Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is scanned, the
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.

Delayed Send
This option lets you send a fax at a later time or date.

Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:

• Advanced Imaging—This adjusts the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, Mirror Image,
Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you fax the
document.

• Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
• Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal
area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is within the area
selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.

• Transmission Log—This prints the transmission log or transmission error log.
• Multifeed Sensor—This detects when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at a time, and then shows an
error message.
Note: This option is supported only in select printer models.

Scanning

144

Scanning
Using Scan to Network
Scan to Network lets you scan your documents to network destinations specified by your system support person. After
the destinations (shared network folders) have been established on the network, the setup process for the application
involves installing and configuring the application on the appropriate printer using its Embedded Web Server. For more
information, see “Setting up Scan to Network” on page 26.

Scanning to an FTP address
Scanner glass

Automatic document feeder (ADF)

Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including
two-sided (duplex) pages.

Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages,
small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. Only one FTP address may be
sent to the server at a time.
When an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person, the name of the destination becomes
available as a shortcut number, or it is listed as a profile under the Held Jobs icon. An FTP destination could also be
another PostScript printer; for example, a color document can be scanned and then sent to a color printer.

Creating shortcuts
Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the printer control panel each time you want to send a document to
an FTP server, you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number. There are two methods for
creating shortcut numbers: using the Embedded Web Server and using the printer control panel.

Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Scanning

145

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Navigate to:
Settings > Other Settings area > Manage Shortcuts > FTP Shortcut Setup

3 Enter the appropriate information.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system support
person.

4 Enter a shortcut number.
Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.

5 Click Add.

Creating an FTP shortcut using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > type the FTP address >

> type a name for the shortcut > Done

2 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
Notes:

• If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
• If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.

Scanning to an FTP address
You can use the printer to send scanned documents to an FTP address in a number of ways. You can type the FTP
address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book. You can also use the Multi Send, Scan to Network, or
MyShortcut application from the printer home screen. For more information, see the "Activating the home screen
applications" section of the User’s Guide.

Scanning to an FTP address using the printer control panel
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > type the FTP address > Done > Send It

Scanning

146

Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, press # on the keypad, and then enter the FTP shortcut number.
4 Touch

> Send It.

Scanning an FTP using the address book
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

> type the name of the recipient > Search

4 Touch the name of the recipient.
Note: To search for additional recipients, touch New Search, and then type the name of the next recipient.

5 Touch

> Send It.

Scanning

147

Scanning to a computer or flash drive
Scanner glass

Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)

Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).

The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive. The computer does not have to be directly
connected to the printer for you to receive images using Scan to Computer. You can scan the document back to the
computer over the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the printer.

Scanning to a computer using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Scan Profile > Create Scan Profile.
3 Select your scan settings, and then click Next.
4 Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scan image.
5 Type a scan name, and then a user name.
Note: The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.

6 Click Submit.
Note: Clicking Submit automatically assigns a shortcut number. You can use this shortcut number when you are
ready to scan your documents.

7 Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen.
a Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Scanning

148

Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

b If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
c Do either of the following:
• Press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
• From the home screen, navigate to:
Held Jobs > Profiles > select your shortcut on the list
Note: The scanner scans and sends the document to the directory you specified.

8 View the file from the computer.
Note: The output file is saved in the location or launched in the program you specified.

Setting up Scan to Computer
Notes:

• This feature is supported only in Windows Vista or later.
• Make sure that your computer and printer are connected to the same network.
1 Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK

In Windows 7 or earlier
a Click
or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
2 Depending on your operating system, click Add devices and printers, Add a device, or Add a printer.
3 Select your printer from the list.
Note: To identify your printer, print a network setup page, and then look for “Fully Qualified Domain Name” in
the TCP/IP section.

4 Click Next > Close.
5 Depending on your device, do either of the following:.
• Press and hold the printer you want to configure.
• Right‑click the printer you want to configure.
6 From the menu that appears, select Scan Properties or Properties, and then change the settings as necessary.

Scanning

149

7 From the printer control panel, touch Scan to Computer and then select from the following options:
• Scan—Scan and save the document directly to a selected location on the computer.
• Scan for Print—Scan and automatically print the document.
• Scan for E‑mail—Attach a scanned document to an e‑mail.
• Scan for Fax—Attach a scanned document to be sent through fax.
8 Touch Send It.
Remote scan in progress appears on the printer display. The scanned image opens automatically on the
computer screen.

Scanning to a flash drive
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:

• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer.
Note: The USB Drive home screen appears.

4 Select the destination folder, and then touch Scan to USB drive.
Note: The printer goes back to the home screen after 30 seconds of inactivity.

5 Adjust the scan settings, and then touch Scan It.

Understanding the scan options
FTP
This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

File Name
This option lets you type a file name for the scan image.

Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a shortcut name.
Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.

Scanning

150

Original Size
This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to scan. When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes,
you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter‑ and legal‑size pages).

Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
Select one of the following:

• PDF—Use to create a single file with multiple pages.
• Secure PDF—Use to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.
• TIFF—Use to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu, then TIFF
saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.

• JPEG—Use to create and attach a separate file for each page of the original document.
• XPS—Use to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.

Resolution
This option lets you adjust the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the
time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.

Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the scanned documents are in relation to the original document.

Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:

• Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the paper.
• Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and
Binding settings to match the orientation.

• Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.

Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Select from the following content types:

•
•
•
•

Scanning

151

Select from the following content sources:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the file. When the first page is scanned, the
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.

Using the advanced options
Select from the following settings:

• Custom Job—This combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
• Edge Erase—This removes smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal
area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is within the area
selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.

Understanding the printer menus

152

Understanding the printer menus
Menus list
Paper Menu

Reports

Network/Ports

Security

Settings

Default Source
Paper Size/Type

Menu Settings Page
Device Statistics

Active NIC

General Settings
Copy Settings

Configure MP

Network Setup Page

Standard USB

Edit Security Setups
Miscellaneous Security
Settings

Parallel [x]
Serial [x]

Confidential Print

E‑mail Settings

Disk Wiping

FTP Settings

SMTP Setup

Security Audit Log

Flash Drive Menu

Set Date and Time

Print Settings

Substitute Size
Paper Texture

Network [x] Setup
Page

Paper Weight

Shortcut List

Paper Loading

Fax Job Log

Custom Types

Fax Call Log

Custom Names
Custom Scan Sizes

Copy Shortcuts
E-mail Shortcuts

Custom Bin Names

Fax Shortcuts

Universal Setup

FTP Shortcuts

Bin Setup

Profiles List

Standard

Network1

Print Fonts
Print Directory
Asset Report
Help

Manage Shortcuts

Option Card Menu2

Print All Guides

Fax Shortcuts

Copy Guide

E-mail Shortcuts

E-mail Guide

FTP Shortcuts

A list of installed DLEs
(Download Emulators)
appears.

Fax Guide

Copy Shortcuts

FTP Guide

Profile Shortcuts

Print Defects Guide
Information Guide
Supplies Guide

Depending on the printer setup, this menu appears as Standard Network or Network [x].

This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed.

Fax Settings

Understanding the printer menus

153

Paper menu
Default Source menu
Use

Default Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope

Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Notes:

• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to "Cassette" for Multipurpose
Feeder to appear as a menu setting.

• If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays have
the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked. When one tray
is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.

Configure MP menu
Use

Configure MP
Cassette
Manual
First

Determine when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:

• Cassette is the factory default setting. Cassette configures the
multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source.

• Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual‑feed print jobs.
• First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source.

Understanding the printer menus

154

Paper Size/Type menu
Use

Tray [x] Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS‑B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope

Specify the paper size loaded in each tray.

Tray [x] Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]

Specify the type of paper loaded in each tray.

Notes:

• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.

• If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays have
the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked. The
multipurpose feeder may also be linked. When one tray is empty, the
print job continues using the linked tray.

• The A6 paper size is supported only in Tray 1 and in the multipurpose
feeder.

Notes:

• Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type [x] is
the factory default setting for all other trays.

• If available, a user‑defined name will appear instead of Custom Type [x].
• Use this menu to configure automatic tray linking.

Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.

Understanding the printer menus

155

Use

MP Feeder Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope

Specify the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder.

MP Feeder Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]

Specify the paper type loaded in the multipurpose feeder.

Notes:

• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.

• From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Cassette” for MP Feeder
Size to appear as a menu.

• The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect paper size. The
paper size value must be set.

Notes:

• Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, set Configure to “Cassette” for MP Feeder Type
to appear as a menu.

Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.

Understanding the printer menus

156

Use

Manual Paper Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal

Specify the size of the paper being manually loaded.

Manual Paper Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]

Specify the paper type being manually loaded.

Manual Envelope Size
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope

Specify the envelope size being manually loaded.

Manual Envelope Type
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Custom Type [x]

Specify the envelope type being manually loaded.

Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.

Notes:

• Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Manual” for Manual Paper
Type to appear as a menu.

Note: 10 Envelope is the U.S. factory default setting. DL Envelope is the
international factory default setting.

Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.

Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.

Understanding the printer menus

157

Use

Default ADF Media Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom [x]

Specify the media type being loaded in the ADF.
Note: Plain Paper is the factory default setting.

Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.

Substitute Size menu
Use

Substitute Size
Off
Statement/A5
Letter/A4
All Listed

Substitute a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available.
Notes:

• All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are
allowed.

• Off indicates that no size substitutions are allowed.
• Setting a size substitution lets the print job continue without Change
Paper appearing.

Paper Texture menu
Use

Plain Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the plain paper loaded in a specific tray.

Card Stock Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the card stock loaded in a specific tray.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Normal is the factory default setting.
• These options appear only if card stock is supported.

Understanding the printer menus

Use

Transparency Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the transparencies loaded in a specific tray.

Recycled Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded in a specific tray.

Labels Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the labels loaded in a specific tray.

Vinyl Labels Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the vinyl labels loaded in a specific tray.

Bond Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the bond paper loaded in a specific tray.

Envelope Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the envelopes loaded in a specific tray.

Rough Envelope Texture
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the rough envelopes loaded in a specific tray.

Letterhead Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the letterhead loaded in a specific tray.

Preprinted Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded in a specific tray.

Colored Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the colored paper loaded in a specific tray.

Light Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the light paper loaded in a specific tray.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Note: Rough is the factory default setting.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

158

Understanding the printer menus

159

Use

Heavy Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the heavy paper loaded in a specific tray.

Rough/Cotton Texture
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the rough or cotton paper loaded in a specific tray.

Custom [x] Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough

Specify the relative texture of the custom paper loaded in a specific tray.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Paper Weight menu
Use

Plain Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy

Specify the relative weight of the plain paper loaded.

Card Stock Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy

Specify the relative weight of the card stock loaded.

Transparency Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy

Specify the relative weight of the transparencies loaded.

Recycled Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy

Specify the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded.

Labels Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy

Specify the relative weight of the labels loaded.

Vinyl Labels Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy

Specify the relative weight of the vinyl labels loaded.

Bond Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy

Specify the relative weight of the bond paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

160

Use

Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy

Specify the relative weight of the envelope loaded.

Rough Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy

Specify the relative weight of the rough envelope loaded.

Letterhead Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy

Specify the relative weight of the letterhead loaded.

Preprinted Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy

Specify the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded.

Colored Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy

Specify the relative weight of the colored paper loaded.

Light Weight
Light

Specify that the weight of the paper loaded is light.

Heavy Weight
Heavy

Specify that the weight of the paper loaded is heavy.

Rough/Cotton Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy

Specify the relative weight of the cotton or rough paper loaded.

Custom [x] Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy

Specify the relative weight of the custom paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Normal is the factory default setting.
• The options appear only when the custom type is supported.

Understanding the printer menus

161

Paper Loading menu
Use

Card Stock Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Card Stock
as the paper type.

Recycled Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Recycled
as the paper type.

Labels Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Labels as
the paper type.

Vinyl Labels Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Vinyl
Labels as the paper type.

Bond Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Bond as
the paper type.

Letterhead Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Letterhead
as the paper type.

Preprinted Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Preprinted
as the paper type.

Colored Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Colored
as the paper type.

Light Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Light as
the paper type.

Heavy Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Heavy as
the paper type.

Rough/Cotton Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Rough or
Cotton as the paper type.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections.
• Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from
Print Properties or the print dialog, depending on your operating system.

Understanding the printer menus

162

Use

Custom [x] Loading
Duplex
Off

Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Custom [x]
as the paper type.
Note: Custom [x] Loading is available only when the custom type is
supported.

Notes:

Custom Types menu
Use

Custom Type [x]
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Envelope

Associate a paper or specialty media type with a factory default custom type
name or a user‑defined custom name created from the Embedded Web Server
or from MarkVisionTM Professional.

Recycled
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Envelope

Specify a paper type when Recycled is selected in other menus.

Notes:

• Paper is the factory default setting.
• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.

Notes:

• Paper is the factory default setting.
• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.

Custom Names menu
Use

Custom Name [x]

Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces Custom Type [x] in
the printer menus.

Understanding the printer menus

163

Custom Scan Sizes menu
Use

Custom Scan Size [x]
Scan Size Name
Media Type

Specify a custom scan size name, scan sizes, and options. The custom scan size
name replaces Custom Scan Size [x] in the printer menus.

ADF Media Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Enveloope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Width
1–8.5 inches (25–216 mm)
Height
1–25 inches (25–635.0 mm)
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
2 scans per side
Off
On

Notes:

• ADF Media Type is the factory default setting for custom scan sizes 3, 4,
5, and 6.

• Rough/Cotton is the factory default setting for custom scan sizes 1 and 2.
• 8.5 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Width. 210 millimeters is
the international factory default setting for Width.

• 14 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Height. 297 millimeters is
the international factory default setting for Height.

• Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation.
• Off is the factory default setting for “2 scans per side.”

Universal Setup menu
Use

Units of Measure
Inches
Millimeters

Identify the units of measure.
Notes:

• Inches is the US factory default setting.
• Millimeters is the international factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

164

Use

Portrait Width
3–8.5 inches
76–216 mm

Set the portrait width.
Notes:

• If the width exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum width allowed.

• 8.5 inches is the US factory default setting. You can increase the
width in 0.01‑inch increments.

• 216 mm is the international factory default setting. You can increase
the width in 1‑mm increments.
Portrait Height
3–14.17 inches
76–360 mm

Set the portrait height.
Notes:

• If the height exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum height allowed.

• 14 inches is the US factory default setting. You can increase the
height in 0.01‑inch increments.

• 356 mm is the international factory default setting. You can increase
the height in 1‑mm increments.
Feed Direction
Short Edge
Long Edge

Specify the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either direction.
Notes:

• Short Edge is the factory default setting.
• Long Edge appears only when the longest edge is shorter than the
maximum width supported in the tray.

Reports Menu
Reports menu
Use

Menu Settings Page

Print a report containing information about the paper loaded in trays, installed
memory, total page count, alarm settings, timeouts, printer control panel
language, TCP/IP address, status of supplies, status of the network connection,
and other information.

Device Statistics

Print a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and number
of printed pages.

Network Setup Page

Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as
the TCP/IP address information.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected
to print servers.

Network [x] Setup Page

Print a report containing information about the network settings of the printer,
such as the TCP/IP address information.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected
to print servers, and when there is more than one network option installed.

Understanding the printer menus

165

Use

Shortcut List

Print a report containing information about configured shortcuts.

Fax Job Log

Print a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes.
Notes:

• This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax
Settings menu.

• This menu is supported only in select printer models.
Fax Call Log

Print a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received, and
blocked calls.
Notes:

• This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax
Settings menu.

• This menu is supported only in select printer models.
Copy Shortcuts

Print a report containing information about copy shortcuts.

E‑mail Shortcuts

Print a report containing information about e‑mail shortcuts.

Fax Shortcuts

Print a report containing information about fax shortcuts.

FTP Shortcuts

Print a report containing information about FTP shortcuts.

Profiles List

Print a list of profiles stored in the printer.

Print Fonts

Print a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in
the printer.

Print Directory

Print a list of all the resources stored in an optional flash memory card or printer
hard disk.
Notes:

• Job Buffer Size must be set to 100%.
• Make sure the optional flash memory or printer hard disk is working and
installed correctly.
Asset Report

Print a report containing asset information including the printer serial number
and model name. The report contains text and UPC bar codes that can be scanned
into an asset database.

Network/Ports menu
Active NIC menu
Use

Active NIC
Auto
[list of available network cards]

Allow the printer to connect to a network.
Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only if an optional network adapter is installed.

Understanding the printer menus

166

Standard Network or Network [x] menu
Note: Only active ports appear in this menu. All inactive ports are omitted.
Use

PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off

Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires
it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• If PCL SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine incoming
data and it uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off

Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it,
regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• If PS SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine incoming
data and it uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu.
NPA Mode
Off
Auto

Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel, and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Network Buffer
Auto
3KB to [maximum size allowed]

Set the size of the network input buffer.
Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The value can be changed in 1KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.

• To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buffers.

• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto

Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing. This menu only
appears when a formatted disk is installed.
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buffers print jobs only when the printer is busy processing data from
another input port.

• Changing this setting from the printer control panel, and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.

Understanding the printer menus

167

Use

Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto

Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.

Standard Network Setup OR
Network [x] Setup
Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
Wireless
AppleTalk

Show and set the printer network settings.

Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless
network.

Reports menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:

• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Reports
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Reports
Use

Print Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address.

Network Card menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:

• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Network Card
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Network Card
Use

View Card Status
Connected
Disconnected

View the connection status of the wireless network adapter.

View Card Speed

View the speed of an active wireless network adapter.

Network Address
UAA
LAA

View the network addresses.

Understanding the printer menus

168

Use

Job Timeout

Set the amount of time it takes for a network print job to be canceled.

0, 10–225 seconds

Notes:

• “90 seconds” is the factory default setting.
• A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.
• If a value between 1 and 9 is selected, then Invalid appears on the
display, and the value is not saved.
Allow the printer to print a banner page.

Banner Page
Off
On

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

TCP/IP menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:

• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > TCP/IP
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > TCP/IP
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers attached to print servers.
Use

Set Hostname

Set the current TCP/IP host name.
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.

IP Address

View or change the current TCP/IP address.
Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP
settings to Off. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that
support BOOTP and RARP.

Netmask

View or change the current TCP/IP netmask.

Gateway

View or change the current TCP/IP gateway.

Enable DHCP
On
Off

Specify the DHCP address and parameter assignment.

Enable RARP
On
Off

Specify the RARP address assignment setting.

Enable BOOTP
On
Off

Specify the BOOTP address assignment setting.

Enable AutoIP
Yes
No

Specify the Zero Configuration Networking setting.

Enable FTP/TFTP
Yes
No

Enable the built-in FTP server, which lets you send files to the printer using File Transfer
Protocol.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

169

Use

Enable HTTP Server
Yes
No

Enable the built-in Web server (Embedded Web Server). When enabled, the printer
can be monitored and managed remotely using a Web browser.

WINS Server Address

View or change the current WINS server address.

Enable DDNS
Yes
No

View or change the current DDNS setting.

Enable mDNS
Yes
No

View or change the current mDNS setting.

DNS Server Address

View or change the current DNS server address.

Backup DNS Server Address

View or change the backup DNS server addresses.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

Backup DNS Server Address 2
Backup DNS Server Address 3
Enable HTTPS
Yes
No

View or change the current HTTPS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

IPv6 menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:

• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > IPv6
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > IPv6
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.
Use

Enable IPv6
On
Off

Enable IPv6 in the printer.

Auto Configuration
On
Off

Specify whether or not the wireless network adapter accepts the
automatic IPv6 address configuration entries provided by a router.

View Hostname

Set the host name.

View Address

Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.

View Router Address
Enable DHCPv6
On
Off

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Enable DHCPv6 in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

170

Wireless menu
Note: This menu is available only in printers connected to a wireless network or printer models that have a wireless
network adapter.
To access the menu, navigate to:
Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless
Use

Wi‑Fi Protected Setup
Start Push Button Method
Start PIN Method

Establish a wireless network and enable network security.
Notes:

• Start Push Button Method connects the printer to a wireless
network when buttons on both the printer and the access point
(wireless router) are pressed within a given period of time.

• Start PIN Method connects the printer to a wireless network when
a PIN on the printer is entered into the wireless settings of the
access point.
Enable/Disable WPS Auto‑detection
Enable
Disable

Automatically detect the connection method that an access point with
WPS uses—Start Push Button Method or Start PIN Method.

Network Mode

Specify the network mode.

BSS Type
Infrastructure
Ad hoc

Notes:

Note: Disable is the factory default setting.

• Infrastructure is the factory default setting. This lets the printer
access a network using an access point.

• Ad hoc configures wireless connection directly between the printer
and a computer.
Compatibility
802.11b/g
802.11b/g/n

Specify the wireless standard for the wireless network.

Choose Network

Select an available network for the printer to use.

View Signal Quality

View the quality of the wireless connection.

View Security Mode

View the encryption method for the wireless network.

Note: 802.11b/g/n is the factory default setting.

AppleTalk menu
Note: This menu appears only in printer models that are connected to an Ethernet network or when an optional
wireless network adapter is installed.
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:

• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > AppleTalk
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > AppleTalk

Understanding the printer menus

171

Use

Activate
Yes
No

Enable or disable AppleTalk support.

View Name

Show the assigned AppleTalk name.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

Note: The AppleTalk name can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
View Address

Show the assigned AppleTalk address.
Note: The AppleTalk address can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.

Set Zone
Provide a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network.
[list of zones available on the network] Note: The default zone for the network is the factory default setting.

Standard USB menu
Use

PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off

Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to
Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off

Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto

Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then process it appropriately.

• The printer automatically restarts when changing the setting from the printer
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.

Understanding the printer menus

172

Use

USB Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]

Set the size of the USB input buffer.
Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the printer hard
disk are printed before normal processing resumes.

• The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1-K increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.

• To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer, disable or reduce the
size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.

• The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the printer
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto

Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• On buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.

• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto

Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.

ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy

Set the network address information for an external print server.

ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy

Set the netmask information for an external print server.

ENA Gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy

Set the gateway information for an external print server.

Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.

Parallel [x] menu
Note: This menu appears only when an optional parallel card is installed.

Understanding the printer menus

173

Use

PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off

Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off

Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto

Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.

Parallel Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]

Set the size of the parallel input buffer.
Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Disabled turns off job buffering. Any print jobs already buffered on the printer
hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes.

• The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.

• To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer, disable or reduce
the size of the USB, serial, and network buffers.

• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto

Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.

• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.

Understanding the printer menus

174

Use

Advanced Status
On
Off

Enable bidirectional communication through the parallel port.

Protocol
Standard
Fastbytes

Specify the parallel port protocol.

Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• Off disables parallel port negotiation.
Notes:

• Fastbytes is the factory default setting. It provides compatibility with most
existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting.

• Standard tries to resolve parallel port communication problems.
Honor Init
On
Off

Determine if the printer honors printer hardware initialization requests from the
computer.
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the
parallel port. Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the
computer is turned on.
Parallel Mode 2
On
Off

Determine if the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of a
strobe.

Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto

Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.

ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy

Set the network address information for an external print server.

ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy

Set the netmask information for an external print server.

ENA Gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy

Set the gateway information for an external print server.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.

Serial [x] menu
Note: This menu appears only when an optional serial card is installed.

Understanding the printer menus

175

Use

PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off

Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:

Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:

Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then processes it appropriately.

• When set to On, the printer performs NPA processing. If the data is not in NPA
format, it is rejected as bad data.

• When set to Off, the printer does not perform NPA processing.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Serial Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]

Set the size of the serial input buffer.
Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the disk are
printed before normal processing is resumed.

• The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.

• To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer, disable or reduce
the size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.

• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.

Understanding the printer menus

176

Use

Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto

Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting. The printer does not buffer print jobs on the
printer hard disk.

• On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.

• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Protocol
DTR
DTR/DSR
XON/XOFF
XON/XOFF/DTR
XONXOFF/DTRDSR

Robust XON
On
Off

Select the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port.
Notes:

•
•
•
•

DTR is the factory default setting.
DTR/DSR is a hardware handshaking setting.
XON/XOFF is a software handshaking setting.
XON/XOFF/DTR and XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR are combined hardware and
software handshaking settings.

Determine whether the printer communicates availability to the computer.
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to
XON/XOFF.

Baud
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
138200
172800
230400
345600

Specify the rate at which data can be received through the serial port.

Data Bits
7
8

Specify the number of data bits sent in each transmission frame.

Notes:

• 9600 is the factory default setting.
• 138200, 172800, 230400, and 345600 baud rates are only displayed in the
Standard Serial menu. These settings do not appear in the Serial Option 1,
Serial Option 2, or Serial Option 3 menus.

Note: 8 is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

177

Use

Parity
Even
Odd
None
Ignore

Set the parity for serial input and output data frames.

Honor DSR
On
Off

Determine whether the printer uses the DSR Signal.

Note: None is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• DSR is a handshaking signal used by most serial cables. The serial port uses
DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by electrical
noise in the serial cable. The electrical noise can cause stray characters to
print. Set this to On to prevent stray characters from printing.

SMTP Setup menu
Use

Primary SMTP Gateway

Specify SMTP server gateway and port information.

Primary SMTP Gateway Port

Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.

Secondary SMTP Gateway
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
SMTP Timeout
5–30

Specify the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to
send an e‑mail.
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.

Reply Address

Specify a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e-mail sent by the
printer.

Use SSL
Disabled
Negotiate
Required

Set the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the
SMTP server.
Notes:

• Disabled is the factory default setting.
• When the Negotiate setting is used, the SMTP server determines if
SSL will be used.

SMTP Server Authentication
No authentication required
Login/Plain
CRAM‑MD5
Digest‑MD5
NTLM
Kerberos 5

Specify the type of user authentication required for scan‑to e‑mail
privileges.
Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

178

Use

Device‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials

Specify what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP
server. Some SMTP servers require credentials to send an e-mail.
Notes:

User‑Initiated E‑mail*
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Use Session User ID & Password
Use Session E‑mail address & Password
Prompt User

• None is the factory default setting for Device‑Initiated E‑mail and
User‑Initiated E‑mail.

• Device Userid and Device Password are used to log in to the SMTP
server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected.

Device Userid
Device Password
Kerberos 5 Realm
NTLM Domain

Security menu
Edit Security Setups menu
Use

Edit Backup Password
Use Backup Password

Create a backup password.

• Off
• On
Password

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting for “Use Backup Password.”
• This menu item appears only if a backup password exists.

Edit Building Blocks
Internal Accounts
NTLM
Simple Kerberos Setup
Kerberos Setup
Active Directory
LDAP
LDAP+GSSAPI
Password
PIN

Edit settings for Internal Accounts, NTLM, Simple Kerberos Setup, Kerberos Setup,
Active Directory, LDAP, Password, and PIN.

Edit Security Templates
[list of available templates]

Add or edit a security template.

Understanding the printer menus

179

Use

Edit Access Controls
Administrative Menus
Function Access
Management
Solutions
Cancel jobs at the Device

Control access to printer menus, firmware updates, held jobs, and other access
points.

Miscellaneous Security Settings menu
Use

Limit the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control
panel before all users are locked out.
Notes:

• “Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are
locked out. Settings range from 1 to 10 attempts is the factory default setting.

• “Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login
attempts can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1 to 60
minutes. 5 minutes is the factory default setting.

• “Lockout time” specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the
login failures limit. Settings range from 1 to 60 minutes. 5 minutes is the
factory default setting. 1 indicates the printer does not impose a lockout time.

• “Panel Login Timeout” specifies how long the printer remains idle on the
Home screen before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1
to 900 seconds. 30 seconds is the factory default setting.

• “Remote Login Timeout” specifies how long a remote interface remains idle
before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1 to 120
seconds. 10 minutes is the factory default setting.
Security Reset Jumper
Access controls=”No Security”
No Effect
Reset factory security defaults

Change the value of the security settings.
Notes:

• Access controls=”No Security” retains all the security information that the user
has defined. “No Security" is the factory default setting.

• “No Effect” means the reset has no effect on the device’s security
configuration.

• “Reset factory security defaults” deletes all security information that the user
has defined, and assigns the factory default value to each setting in the
Miscellaneous Security Settings section of both the panel and the Embedded
Web Server.

Understanding the printer menus

180

Use

LDAP Certificate Verification
Demand
Try
Allow
Never

Allow the user to request a server certificate.
Notes:

• “Demand” means a server certificate is requested. If a bad certificate is
provided or if no certificate is provided, then the session is terminated
immediately. “Demand” is the factory default setting.

• “Try” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided, then
the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then the session
is terminated immediately.

• “Allow” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided,
then the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then it will
be ignored, and then the session proceeds normally.

• “Never” means no server certificate is requested.
Minimum PIN Length
1–16

Limit the digit length of the PIN.
Note: 4 is the is the factory default setting.

Confidential Print menu
Use

Max Invalid PIN
Off
2–10

Set a limit on the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Notes:

• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
• When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted.

Confidential Job Expiration Set a limit on how long the printer stores confidential print jobs.
Off
Notes:
1 hour
• If the “Confidential Job Expiration” setting is changed while confidential print jobs
4 hours
reside in the printer memory or printer hard disk, then the expiration time for those
24 hours
print jobs does not change to the new default value.
1 week
• If the printer is turned off, then all confidential jobs held in the printer memory are
deleted.
Repeat Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week

Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

181

Use

Verify Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week

Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification.

Reserve Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week

Set a limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Disk Wiping menu
Disk Wiping erases only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by the file system. All
permanent data on the printer hard disk are preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.
Note: This menu appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Use

Wiping Mode
Auto

Specify the mode for disk wiping.

Automatic Method
Single pass
Multiple pass

Mark all disk space used by a previous print job. This method does not permit the file
system to reuse this space until it has been cleared.
Notes:

• “Single pass” is the factory default setting.
• Only automatic wiping enables users to activate disk wiping without having to
turn off the printer for an extended amount of time.

• Highly confidential information should be wiped using only the Multiple pass
method.

Security Audit Log menu
Use

Export Log

Let an authorized user export the audit log.
Notes:

• To export the audit log from the printer control panel, a flash drive must be
attached to the printer.

• The audit log can be downloaded from the Embedded Web Server and saved
on a computer.

Understanding the printer menus

182

Use

Delete Log
Yes
No

Specify whether or not audit logs are deleted.

Configure Log
Enable Audit
Yes
No
Enable Remote Syslog
No
Yes
Remote Syslog Facility
0–23
Severity of events to log
0–7

Specify how and whether or not audit logs are created.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Enable Audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log and
remote syslog. No is the factory default setting.

• Enable Remote Syslog determines if logs are sent to a remote server. No is the
factory default setting.

• Remote Syslog Facility determines the value used to send logs to the remote
syslog server. 4 is the factory default setting.

• If the security audit log is activated, then the severity value of each event is
recorded. 4 is the factory default setting.

Set Date/Time menu
Use

Current Date and Time

View the current date and time settings for the printer.

Manually Set Date and Time

Enter the date and time.
Note: Date/Time is set in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS format.

Time Zone

Select the time zone.
Note: GMT is the factory default setting.

Automatically Observe DST
On
Off

Set the printer to use the applicable daylight saving time (DST) start and end times
associated with the printer Time Zone setting.

Custom Time Zone Setup
DST Start Week
DST Start Day
DST Start Month
DST Start Time
DST End Week
DST End Day
DST End Month
DST End Time
DST Offset

Enable the user to set up the time zone.

Enable NTP
On
Off

Enable Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a
network.

NTP Server

View the NTP server address.

Note: On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time
associated with the Time Zone setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

183

Use

Enable Authentication
On
Off

Change the authentication setting to On or Off.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Settings menu
General Settings menu
Use

Display Language
English
Francais
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Portuguese
Suomi
Russian
Polski
Greek
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Korean
Japanese

Set the language of the text appearing on the printer display.

Eco-Mode
Off
Energy
Energy/Paper
Paper

Minimize the use of energy, paper, or specialty media.

Note: Not all languages are available for all printers, and you may
need to install special hardware for those languages to appear.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting. This resets the printer to its
factory default settings.

• The Energy setting minimizes the power used by the printer.
Performance may be affected, but print quality is not.

• Energy/Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and
specialty media.

• Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media
needed for a print job. Performance may be affected, but
print quality is not.

Understanding the printer menus

184

Use

ADF Loaded Beep
Enabled
Disabled

Specify whether or not the ADF sounds a beep when paper is
loaded.

ADF Multi‑feed Sensor
On
Off

Detect when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper at once.

Quiet Mode
Off
On

Reduce the amount of noise produced by the printer.

Note: Enabled is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting. This supports the
performance specifications for your printer.

• On configures the printer to produce as little noise as
possible. This is best suited for printing text and line art.

• For optimal printing of color‑rich documents, set Quiet Mode
to Off.

• Selecting Photo from the printer driver may disable Quiet
Mode and provide better print quality and full speed
printing.
Run Initial setup
Yes
No

Instruct the printer to run the setup wizard.
Notes:

• Yes is the factory default setting.
• After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the
“Country select” screen, the default becomes No.

Understanding the printer menus

185

Use

Keyboard
Keyboard Type
English
Francais
Francais Canadien
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Greek
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Suomi
Portuguese
Russian
Polski
Swiss German
Swiss French
Korean
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Japanese
Custom Key [x]

Specify a language and custom key information for the printer
keyboard. The additional tabs enable access to accent marks and
symbols from the keyboard.

Paper Sizes
US
Metric

Specify the default paper measurement.
Notes:

• U.S. is the factory default setting.
• The initial setting is determined by your country or region
selection in the initial setup wizard.

• Changing this also changes the default setting for each input
source in the Paper Size/Type menu.
Scan to PC Port Range
[port range]

Specify a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking
firewall. The valid ports are specified by two sets of numbers
separated by a semicolon.
Note: 9751:12000 is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

186

Use

Displayed Information
Left side
Right side
Custom Text [x]

Specify what is displayed on the upper left and right corners of the
home screen.
For the Left side and Right side menus, select from the following
options:
None
IP Address
Hostname
Contact Name
Location
Date/Time
mDNS/DDNS Service Name
Zero Configuration Name
Custom Text [x]
Model Name
Notes:

• IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side.
• Date/Time is the factory default setting for Right side.
Displayed Information (continued)
Black Toner

Customize the displayed information for Black Toner.
Select from the following options:
When to display
Do not display
Display
Message to display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:

• “Do not display” is the factory default setting for “When to
display.”

• “Default” is the factory default setting for “Message to
display.”

Understanding the printer menus

187

Use

Displayed Information (continued)
Waste Toner Bottle
Paper Jam
Load Paper
Service Errors

Customize the displayed information for Waste Toner Bottle, Paper
Jam, Load Paper, and Service Errors.
Select from the following options:
Display
Yes
No
Message to display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:

• “No” is the factory default setting for “Display.”
• “Default” is the factory default setting for “Message to
display.”
Home screen customization
Change Language
Copy
Copy Shortcuts
Fax
Fax Shortcuts
E‑mail
E‑mail Shortcuts
FTP
FTP Shortcuts
Search Held Jobs
Held Jobs
USB Drive
Profiles and Solutions
Bookmarks
Jobs by user
Forms and Favorites

Change the icons that appear on the home screen.

Date Format
MM‑DD‑YYYY
DD‑MM‑YYYY
YYYY‑MM‑DD

Format the printer date.

Time Format
12 hour A.M./P.M.
24 hour clock

Format the printer time.

For each icon, select from the following options:
Display
Do Not display
Notes:

• “Display” is the factory default setting for Copy, Fax, E‑mail,
FTP, Search Held Jobs, Held jobs, USB Drive, and Forms and
Favorites.

• “Do not display” is the factory default setting for Change
Language, Copy Shortcuts, Fax Shortcuts, Email Shortcuts,
FTP Shortcuts, Profiles and Solutions, Bookmarks, and Jobs
by user.

Notes:

• MM‑DD‑YYYY is the U.S. factory default setting.
• DD-MM-YYYY is the international factory default setting.
Note: “12 hour A.M./P.M.” is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

188

Use

Screen Brightness
20–100

Specify the brightness of the printer control panel screen.

One Page Copy
Off
On

Set copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time.

Output Lighting
Normal/Standby Mode
Off
Dim
Bright

Set the amount of light from the standard bin.

Note: 100 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Dim is the factory default setting if Eco-Mode is set to Energy
or Energy/Paper.

• Bright is the factory default setting if Eco-Mode is Off or set
to Paper.

Error Lighting
On
Off

Determine if indicator lights blink when the printer encounters
errors.

Audio Feedback
Button Feedback
On
Off
Volume
1–10

Set the audio volume for the buttons.

Tactile Touchscreen Feedback
On
Off

Provide touch‑screen sensation feedback.

Show Bookmarks
Yes
No

Specify whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area.

Allow Background Removal
On
Off

Specify whether image background removal is allowed in copy, fax,
e‑mail, FTP, or scan‑to‑USB jobs.

Allow Custom Job Scans
On
Off

Scan multiple jobs to one file.

Scanner Jam Recovery
Job level
Page level

Specify how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam occurs
in the ADF.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback.
• 5 is the factory default setting for Volume.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting. When Yes is selected,
bookmarks appear in the Held Jobs area.

Note: On is the factory default setting. The background of the
image will be removed.
Note: On is the factory default setting. If On is selected, then the
Allow Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific jobs.

Notes:

• “Job level” is the factory default setting.
• If “Job level” is selected, then the entire job must be
rescanned if any pages jam.

• If “Page level” is selected, then rescan from the jammed
page forward.

Understanding the printer menus

189

Use

Web Page Refresh Rate
30–300

Specify the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server
refreshes.
Note: 120 is the factory default setting.

Contact Name

Specify a contact name for the printer.
Note: The contact name is stored on the Embedded Web Server.

Location

Specify the location of the printer.
Note: The location is stored on the Embedded Web Server.

Alarms
Alarm Control
Cartridge Alarm

Set an alarm to sound when the printer requires operator
intervention.
For each alarm type, select from the following options:
Off
Single
Continuous
Notes:

• Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control. This
sounds three quick beeps.

• Off is the factory default setting for Cartridge Alarm. This
means no alarm will sound.

• Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds.
Timeouts
Standby Mode
Disabled
1–240

Specify the number of minutes of inactivity before the printer
enters a lower power state.

Timeouts
Sleep Mode
Disabled
1‑180

Set the amount of time in minutes the printer waits after a job is
printed before it goes into a reduced power state.

Note: 15 is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• 30 is the factory default setting.
• Lower settings conserve more energy, but may require
longer warm‑up times.

• Select the lowest setting if the printer shares an electrical
circuit with room lighting or you notice lights flickering in the
room.

• Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use. Under
most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to print
with minimum warm‑up time.

Understanding the printer menus

190

Use

Timeouts
Hibernate Timeout
Disabled
1–3 hr
6 hr
1–3 days
1–2 weeks
1 month

Set the printer to operate at a low power state.

Timeouts
Hibernate Timeout on Connection
Hibernate
Do Not Hibernate

Set the printer to Hibernate Timeout even when there is an active
Ethernet or a phone connection.

Timeouts
Screen Timeout
15–300

Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before
returning the printer display to a Ready state.

Timeouts
Prolong Screen Timeout
On
Off

Set the printer to continue a specified job without returning to the
home screen when the screen timeout timer expires.

Timeouts
Print Timeout
Disabled
1–255

Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an
end‑of‑job message before canceling the remainder of the print
job.

Note: Disabled is the factory default setting in all countries.

Note: Do Not Hibernate is the factory default setting.

Note: 30 is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• 90 is the factory default setting.
• When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in the
printer is printed, and then the printer checks to see if any
new print jobs are waiting.

• Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation.
This has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs.
Timeouts
Wait Timeout
Disabled
15–65535

Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional
data before canceling a print job.
Notes:

• 40 is the factory default setting.
• Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using
PostScript emulation. This has no effect on PCL emulation
print jobs.

Understanding the printer menus

191

Use

Timeouts
Job Hold Timeout
5–255

Set the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention
before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and
continues to print other jobs in the print queue.
Notes:

• 30 is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working
printer hard disk is installed.
Error Recovery
Auto Reboot
Reboot when idle
Reboot always
Reboot never

Automatically reboot the printer back into the normal operation.

Error Recovery
Max Auto Reboots
1–20

Determine the number of automatic reboots the printer can
perform.

Print Recovery

Let the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline
situations when not resolved within the specified time period.

Auto Continue
Disabled
5–255
Print Recovery
Jam Recovery
On
Off
Auto

Note: “Reboot when idle” is the factory default setting.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.

Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
Specify whether the printer reprints jammed pages.
Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints
jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the
pages is needed for other printer tasks.

• On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.
• Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages.
Print Recovery
Jam Assist
On
Off

Set the printer to automatically check for jammed paper.

Print Recovery
Page Protect
Off
On

Let the printer successfully print a page that may not have printed
otherwise.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting. This prints a partial page
when there is not enough memory to print the whole page.

• On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the
entire page prints.

Understanding the printer menus

192

Use

Press Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep
Hibernate

Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts to a short
press of the Sleep button.
Notes:

• Sleep is the factory default setting.
• Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower
power configuration.

• If the printer is in Sleep mode, then the display appears off
and the Sleep button turns amber in color.

• Touch anywhere on the display or press a button on the
printer control panel to exit Sleep mode.

• If the printer is in Hibernate mode, then the display is
completely off and the Sleep button turns amber and is
blinking.
Press and Hold Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep
Hibernate

Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts to a short
press of the Sleep button.
Notes:

• Do Nothing is the factory default setting.
• Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower
power configuration.

• If the printer is in Sleep mode, then the display appears off
and the Sleep button turns amber.

• Press and hold the Sleep button for three seconds or longer
to enter Hibernate mode.

• Touch anywhere on the display or press a button on the
printer control panel to exit Sleep mode.
Factory Defaults
Do Not Restore
Restore Now

Restore the printer settings to the factory default settings.
Notes:

• Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. This keeps the
user‑defined settings.

• Restore Now returns all printer settings to the factory
default settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All
downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored
in flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not affected.

Understanding the printer menus

193

Copy Settings menu
Copy Settings menu items and descriptions
Use

Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo

Specify the content of the original document.

Content Source
Black/White Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other

Specify how the original document was produced.

Sides (Duplex)
1 sided to 1 sided
1 sided to 2 sided
2 sided to 1 sided
2 sided to 2 sided

Specify whether an original document is two‑sided (duplex) or one‑sided, and then to
specify whether the copy should be two‑sided or one‑sided.

Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.

Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• 1 sided to 1 sided—The original document has print on one side and the copy
will also have print on one side.

• 1 sided to 2 sided—The original document has print on one side, while the
copy will have print on both sides.

• 2 sided to 1 sided—The original document has print on both sides, while the
copy will have print on just one side.

• 2 sided to 2 sided—The original document has print on both sides, and the
copy will also have print on both sides.
Paper Saver
Off
2‑up Portrait
4‑up Portrait
2‑up Landscape
4‑up Landscape

Allow copying two or four sheets of a document on one page.

Print Page Borders
On
Off

Specify whether or not a border is printed.

Collate
1,1,1 ‑ 2,2,2
1,2,3 ‑ 1,2,3

Keep the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: “1,2,3 ‑ 1,2,3” is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

194

Use

Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Difficult Media Letter
Difficult Media A5
Difficult Media Legal
Difficult Media A4
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
ID Card

Specify the paper size of the original document.

Copy To Source
Tray [x]
Auto Size Match
Manual Feeder

Specify the paper source for copy jobs.

Transparency Separators
On
Off

Place a sheet of paper between transparencies.

Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages

Place a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs.

Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder

Specify the separator sheet source.

Darkness
1–9

Specify the level of darkness for the copy job.

Notes:

• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting.
• A4 is the international factory default setting.

Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

195

Use

Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]

Specify the standard bin to be used for the copy job.

Number of Copies
1–999

Specify the number of copies for the copy job.

Header/Footer
[Location]
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Custom text

Specify the header or footer information and its location on the page.

Overlay
Confidential
Copy
Draft
Urgent
Custom
Off

Specify the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job.

Custom Overlay

Specify the custom overlay text.

Notes:

• Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
• Bin [x] only appears when at least one optional bin is installed.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
For the location, select from the following options:

•
•
•
•
•
•

Top left
Top middle
Top right
Bottom left
Bottom middle
Bottom right

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting for the location.
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for “Print on.”
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: A maximum of 64 characters is allowed.
Allow priority copies
On
Off

Allow interruption of a print job to copy a page or document.

Custom Job scanning
On
Off

Copy, in a single copy job, a document that contains mixed paper sizes.

Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off

Save custom copy settings as shortcuts.

Background Removal
‑4 to 4

Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.
Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

196

Use

Auto Center
Off
On

Automatically center the content on the page.

Contrast
0–5
Best for content

Specify the contrast used for the copy job.

Mirror Image
Off
On

Create a mirror image of the original document.

Negative Image
Off
On

Create a negative image of the original document.

Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4

Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy.

Sharpness
1–5

Adjust the amount of sharpness of a copy.

Sample Copy
Off
On

Create a sample copy of the original document.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Fax Settings menu
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu
Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job through a telephone line.

General Fax Settings
Use

Fax Name

Specify the name of the fax in the printer.

Fax Number

Specify the telephone number assigned to the fax.

Fax ID
Fax Name
Fax Number

Specify how the fax is identified.

Enable Manual Fax
On
Off

Set the printer to fax manually, which requires a line splitter and a telephone handset.
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax
number.

• Touch # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function.

Understanding the printer menus

197

Use

Memory Use
All receive
Mostly receive
Equal
Mostly send
All send

Define the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs.
Notes:

• “Equal” is the factory default setting. This splits the memory for sending and
receiving fax jobs into equal amounts.

•
•
•
•

“Mostly send” specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs.
“All send” specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs.
“All receive” specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
“Mostly receive” specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs.

Cancel Faxes
Allow
Don't Allow

Specify whether or not the printer cancels fax jobs.

Caller ID
Off
Primary
Alternate

Specify the type of caller ID being used.

Fax number masking
Off
From left
From right

Specify the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number.

Note: Allow is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• The number of characters masked is determined by the “Digits to Mask”
setting.

Digits to Mask
0–58

Specify the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

198

Use

Fax Cover Page
Fax Cover Page
Off by default
On by default
Never use
Always use
Include to Field
On
Off
Include from Field
On
Off
From
Include Message Field
On
Off
Message
Include Logo
On
Off
Include Footer [x]
On
Off
Footer [x]

Configure the fax cover page.
Note: “Off by default” is the factory default setting for all Fax Cover Page options.

Fax Send Settings
Use

Resolution
Standard
Fine 200 dpi
Super Fine 300 dpi
Ultra Fine 600 dpi

Specify quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives better print quality, but
increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

199

Use

Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.

Specify the paper size of the original document.

Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge

Specify how the text and graphics are oriented on a page.

Note: Mixed Sizes is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• “Long edge” assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).

• “Short edge” assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo

Specify the content of the original document.

Content Source
Black/White Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other

Specify how the original document was produced.

Darkness
1–9

Lighten or darken the output.

Dial Prefix

Enter a dialing prefix, such as 99. A numeric entry field is provided.

Note: Text is the factory default setting.

Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

200

Use

Dialing Prefix Rules
Prefix Rule [x]

Establish a dialing prefix rule.

Automatic Redial
0–9

Specify the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number.

Redial frequency
1–200

Specify the number of minutes between redials.

Behind a PABX
Yes
No

Enable or disable switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone.

Enable ECM
Yes
No

Enable or disable Error Correction Mode for fax jobs.

Enable Fax Scans
On
Off

Fax files that are scanned at the printer.

Driver to fax
Yes
No

Allow the printer driver to send fax jobs.

Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off

Save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer.

Dial Mode
Tone
Pulse

Specify the dialing sound, either as a tone or a pulse.

Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600

Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent.

Custom Job scanning
On
Off

Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file.

Scan Preview
On
Off

Specify whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs.

Background Removal
‑4 to 4

Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.

Contrast
0–5
Best for content

Specify the contrast in the scanned image.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Note: No is the factory default setting.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: Tone is the factory default setting.

Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

201

Use

Mirror Image
Off
On

Create a mirror image of the original document.

Negative Image
Off
On

Create a negative image of the original document.

Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4

Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible.

Scan edge to edge
Off
On

Specify if the original document is scanned edge-to‑edge prior to faxing.

Sharpness
1–5

Adjust the sharpness of a fax.

Temperature
‑4 to 4

Specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer output than the
default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the default.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 3 is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Fax Receive Settings
Use

Enable Fax Receive
On
Off

Allow the printer to receive fax jobs.

Fax Job Waiting
None
Toner
Toner and Supplies

Remove fax jobs from the print queue when the job requires specific unavailable
resources.

Rings to Answer
1–25

Specify the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job.

Auto Reduction
On
Off

Scale an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated
fax source.

Paper Source
Auto
Tray [x]
Multi‑Purpose Feeder

Specify the paper source for printing incoming fax jobs.

Sides (Duplex)
Off
On

Enable two‑sided (duplex) printing for incoming fax jobs.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: None is the factory default setting.

Note: 3 is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

202

Use

Separator Sheets
Off
Before Job
After Job

Enable the printer to include separator sheets for incoming fax jobs.

Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder

Specify where the printer picks the separator sheet.

Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]

Specify a bin for received faxes.

Fax Footer
On
Off

Print the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax.

Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600

Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received.

Fax Forwarding
Print
Print and Forward
Forward

Enable forwarding of received faxes to another recipient.

Forward to
Fax
E‑mail
FTP
LDSS
eSF

Specify the type of recipient to which faxes will be forwarded.

Forward to Shortcut

Enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail, FTP, LDSS,
or eSF).

Block No Name Fax
Off
On

Enable blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no fax ID specified.

Banned Fax List

Enable the list of blocked fax numbers stored in the printer.

Holding Faxes
Held Fax Mode
Off
Always On
Manual
Scheduled
Fax Holding Schedule

Enable fax holding all of the time or according to set schedule.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.

Note: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.

Note: Print is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Fax is the factory default setting.
• This menu item is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

203

Fax Log Settings
Use

Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error

Enable printing of a transmission log after each fax job.

Receive Error Log
Print Never
Print on Error

Enable printing of a receive error log following a receive error.

Auto Print Logs
On
Off

Enable automatic printing of fax logs.

Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder

Specify the source of the paper used for printing logs.

Logs Display
Remote Station Name
Dialed Number

Specify whether printed logs display the dialed number or fax name returned.

Enable Job Log
On
Off

Enable access to the Fax Job log.

Enable Call Log
On
Off

Enable access to the Fax Call log.

Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]

Specify the bin where fax logs are printed.

Note: Print log is the factory default setting.

Note: Print Never is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• Logs print after every 200 fax jobs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.

Note: Remote Station Name is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.

Speaker Settings
Use

Speaker Mode
Always Off
On until Connected
Always On

Specify the mode of the speaker.
Notes:

• “On until Connected” is the factory default setting. A sound is issued until the
fax connection is made.

• Always On turns the speaker on.
• Always Off turns the speaker off.
Speaker Volume
High
Low

Control the volume setting.
Note: High is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

204

Use

Ringer Volume
Off
On

Control the fax speaker ringer volume.
Note: On is the factory default setting.

Answer On
Use
All Rings
Single Ring Only
Double Ring Only
Triple Ring Only
Single or Double Rings Only
Single or Triple Rings Only
Double or Triple Rings Only

To
Specify ring patterns when the printer is answering calls.
Note: All Rings is the factory default setting.

E‑mail Settings menu
Use

E‑mail Server Setup
Subject
Message
File Name

Specify e‑mail server information.

E‑mail Server Setup
Send me a copy
Never appears
On by default
Off by default
Always On

Send a copy of the e-mail to the sender.

E‑mail Server Setup
Max E‑mail size
0–65535 KB

Specify the maximum e-mail size in kilobytes (KB).

E‑mail Server Setup
Size Error Message

Send a message when an e-mail is bigger than the configured size limit.

E‑mail Server Setup
Limit destinations

Specify a domain name, such as a company domain name, and then limits e‑mail
destinations only to that domain name.

Notes:

• The subject field has a limitation of 255 characters.
• The message field has a limitation of 512 characters.
Note: “Never appears” is the factory default setting.

Note: E-mails bigger than the specified maximum size are not sent.

Notes:

• E-mail can be sent only to the specified domain.
• The limit is one domain.

Understanding the printer menus

205

Use

E‑mail Server Setup
Web Link Setup
Server
Login
Password
Path
File Name
Web Link

Define the e‑mail server path name; for example: /directory/path.
Note: The characters * : ? < > | are invalid entries for a path name.

Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)

Specify the format of the scanned file.

PDF Version
1.2–1.6
A–1a

Set the version of the PDF file that will be scanned for e‑mailing.

Content Type
Graphics
Text
Text/Photo
Photo

Specify the content of the original document.

Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other

Specify how the original document was produced.

Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi

Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch.

Darkness
1–9

Lighten or darken the output.

Orientation
Portrait
Landscape

Specify the orientation of the scanned image.

Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.

Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.

Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.

Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.

Note: “150 dpi” is the factory default setting.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

206

Use

Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Difficult Media Letter
Difficult Media A5
Difficult Media Legal
Difficult Media A4
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.

Specify the paper size of the document being scanned.

Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long Edge
Short Edge

Specify how text and graphics are oriented on the page.

Notes:

• A4 is the international factory default setting.
• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• Long Edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).

• Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90

Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the image.
Notes:

•
•
•
•

“Best for content” is the factory default setting.
5 reduces the file size and quality of the image.
90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
This menu setting applies to all scan functions.

Text Default
5–90

Set the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the image.

Text/Photo Default
5–90

Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image.

Note: 75 is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

207

Use

Photo Default
5–90

Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image.

E‑mail images sent as
Attachment
Web Link

Specify how the images are sent.

Use Multi‑Page Tiff
On
Off

Choose between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a multiplepage scan‑to‑e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or
multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.

Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu setting applies to all scan functions.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error

Specify whether or not the transmission log prints.

Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder

Specify the paper source for printing e-mail logs.

Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]

Specify the bin for FTP logs.

Custom Job scanning
On
Off

Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes.

Scan Preview
On
Off

Specify whether or not a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs.

Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off

Save e-mail addresses as shortcuts.

Note: Print log is the factory default setting.

Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
• Bin [x] appears only when at least one optional bin is installed.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the Save As Shortcut button does not appear on the e-mail
Destination screen.

Background Removal
‑4 to 4

Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.

Contrast
0–5
Best for content

Specify the contrast of the output.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

208

Use

Mirror Image
Off
On

Create a mirror image of the original document.

Negative Image
Off
On

Create a negative image of the original document.

Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4

Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.

Scan edge to edge
Off
On

Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.

Sharpness
1–5

Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.

Temperature
‑4 to 4

Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer
output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the
default.

Use cc:/bcc:
Off
On

Enable the use of the “cc:” and “bcc:” fields.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 3 is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

FTP Settings menu
Use

Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)

Specify the format of the file for FTP sending.

PDF Version
1.2–1.6
A–1a

Set the version level of the PDF file for FTP sending.

Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo

Specify the content of the original document.

Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.

Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.

Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

209

Use

Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other

Specify how the original document was produced.

Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi

Specify the quality of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).

Darkness
1–9

Lighten or darken the output.

Orientation
Portrait
Landscape

Specify the page orientation of the scanned image.

Specify the paper size of the original document.

Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.

Note: “150 dpi” is the factory default setting.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting.
• A4 is the international factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

210

Use

Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long Edge
Short Edge

Specify the page orientation of text and graphics.
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• Long Edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape ).

• Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape ).
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90

Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the
image.
Notes:

•
•
•
•

“Best for content” is the factory default setting.
5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
This menu setting applies to all scan functions.

Text Default
5–90

Set the quality of the text in relation to the file size and quality of the image.

Text/Photo Default
5–90

Set the quality of a text/photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the
image.

Note: 75 is the factory default setting.

Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90

Set the quality of a photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the image.

Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off

Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan‑to‑FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.

Note: 50 is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu setting applies to all scan functions.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error

Specify whether the transmission log prints.

Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder

Specify a paper source when printing FTP logs.

Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]

Specify the bin for FTP logs.

Note: “Print log” is the factory default setting.

Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
• Bin [x] only appears when at least one optional bin is installed.

Understanding the printer menus

211

Use

File Name

Enter a base file name.
Note: The limitation is 53 characters.

Custom Job Scanning
Off
On

Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single scan job.

Scan Preview
On
Off

Specify whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.

Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off

Enable shortcut creation for FTP addresses.

Background Removal
‑4 to 4

Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.

Contrast
0–5
Best for content

Specify the contrast of the output.

Mirror Image
Off
On

Create a mirror image of the original document.

Negative Image
Off
On

Create a negative image of the original document.

Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4

Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.

Scan edge to edge
Off
On

Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.

Sharpness
1–5

Adjust the amount of sharpness of a scanned image.

Temperature
‑4 to 4

Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer
output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the
default.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 3 is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

212

Flash Drive menu
Scan Settings
Use

Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)

Specify the format of the file to be sent through FTP.

PDF Version
1.2–1.6
A‑1a

Set the version of the PDF file to be sent through FTP.

Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo

Specify the content of the original document.

Content Source
Black/White Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other

Specify how the original document was produced.

Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi

Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).

Darkness
1–9

Lighten or darken the output.

Orientation
Portrait
Landscape

Specify the orientation of the scanned image.

Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.

Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.

Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.

Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.

Note: “150 dpi” is the factory default setting.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

213

Use

Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Difficult Media Letter
Difficult Media A5
Difficult Media Legal
Difficult Media A4
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.

Specify the paper size of the original document.

Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge

Specify how the text and graphics are oriented on a page.

Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• “Long edge” assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).

• “Short edge” assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90

Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Notes:

•
•
•
•

Text Default
5–90

Set the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image.

Text or Photo Default
5–90

Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and quality.

Photo Default
5–90

Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and quality.

Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

214

Use

Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off

Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan to FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page.
Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
File Name

Type a base file name.
Note: You can enter up to 53 characters.

Custom Job Scanning
On
Off

Copy a document containing mixed paper sizes in a single copy job.

Scan Preview
On
Off

Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.

Background Removal
‑4 to 4

Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.

Contrast
0–5
Best for content

Specify the contrast of the scanned image.

Mirror Image
Off
On

Create a mirror image of the original document.

Negative Image
Off
On

Create a negative image of the original document.

Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4

Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.

Scan edge to edge
Off
On

Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.

Sharpness
1–5

Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.

Temperature
‑4 to 4

Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer
output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the
default.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 3 is the factory default setting.

Print Settings
Use

Copies
1–999

Specify a default number of copies for each print job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

Use

Paper Source
Tray [x]
MP Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope

Set a default paper source for all print jobs.

Collate
1,1,1 ‑ 2,2,2
1,2,3 ‑ 1,2,3

Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.

Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided

Specify whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the page.

Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge

Define binding for duplexed pages in relation to page orientation.

215

Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.

Note: “1,2,3 ‑ 1,2,3” is the factory default setting.

Note: “1 sided” is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Long Edge sets binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge
for landscape).

• Short Edge sets binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left
edge for landscape).
Paper Saver
Off
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up

Specify that multiple pages are printed on one side of a sheet.

Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical

Print multiple-page images on one side of a paper.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• The number selected is the number of pages that will print per side.

Notes:

• Horizontal is the factory default setting.
• Positioning depends on the number of pages and whether they are in portrait or landscape
orientation.

Paper Saver Orientation Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document.
Auto
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and landscape.
Landscape
Portrait
Paper Saver Border
None
Solid

Print a border on each page image.
Note: None is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

216

Use

Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages

Specify whether to insert blank separator sheets.
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to
“1,2,3 ‑ 1,2,3.” If Collate is set to “1,1,1 ‑ 2,2,2,” then a blank page is inserted between
each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page 2's.

• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This setting is
useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document .
Separator Sheet Source Specify the paper source for separator sheets.
Tray [x]
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Manual Feeder
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print

Specify whether to insert blank pages in a print job.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.

Print Settings
Setup menu
Use

Printer Language
PCL Emulation
PS Emulation

Set the default printer language.
Notes:

• PS Emulation is the factory default printer language.
• Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a
software program from sending print jobs that use another
printer language.

Job Waiting
On
Off

Specify that print jobs be removed from the print queue if they
require unavailable printer options or custom settings. They are
stored in a separate print queue, so other jobs print normally. When
the missing information or options are obtained, the stored jobs
print.
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.
This requirement ensures that stored jobs are not deleted if
the printer loses power.

Understanding the printer menus

217

Use

Print Area
Normal
Fit to Page
Whole Page

Set the logical and physical printable area.
Notes:

• Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to
print data in the non‑printable area defined by the Normal
setting, the printer clips the image at the boundary.

• Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the
non‑printable area defined by the Normal setting. Whole
Page only affects pages printed using a PCL 5e interpreter.
This has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL or
PostScript interpreter.
Download Target
RAM
Flash
Disk

Set the storage location for downloads.
Notes:

• RAM is the factory default setting. Storing downloads in the
RAM is temporary.

• Storing downloads in the flash memory or in a printer hard
disk places them in permanent storage. Downloads remain in
the flash memory or in the printer hard disk even when the
printer is turned off.

• This menu appears only when a formatted, working flash
drive or printer hard disk is installed.
Resource Save
On
Off

Specify how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as
fonts and macros stored in the RAM, when the printer receives a
job that requires more memory than is available.
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting. This sets the printer to
retain the downloads only until memory is needed.
Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs.

• On retains the downloads during language changes and
printer resets. If the printer runs out of memory, then
Memory Full [38] appears, and downloads are not
deleted.
Print All Order
Alphabetical
Oldest First
Newest First

Specify the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed
when Print All is selected.
Note: Alphabetical is the factory default setting. Print jobs always
appear in alphabetical order on the printer control panel.

Understanding the printer menus

218

Finishing menu
Use

Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided

Specify whether two‑sided (duplex) printing is set as the default for all print jobs.
Notes:

• “1 sided” is the factory default setting.
• You can set two‑sided printing from the software program.
For Windows users:
Click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
For Macintosh users:
Choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the print dialog and
pop‑up menus.

Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge

Define the way duplexed pages are bound and printed.
Notes:

• Long Edge is the factory default setting.
• Long Edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).

• Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Copies
1–999

Specify the default number of copies for each print job.

Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print

Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.

Collate
1,1,1 ‑ 2,2,2
1,2,3 ‑ 1,2,3

Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.

Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages

Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.

Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• “1,1,1 ‑ 2,2,2” is the factory default setting.
• “1,2,3 ‑ 1,2,3” stacks the print job in sequence.
Notes:

• None is the factory default setting.
• Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if

Collate is set to “1,2,3 ‑ 1,2,3.” If Collate is set to ”1,1,1 ‑ 2,2,2,” then a blank
page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's
and after all page 2's.

• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job. This
setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in
a document.

Understanding the printer menus

219

Use

Separator Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder

Specify the paper source for separator sheets.
Notes:

• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to "Cassette" for Manual Feeder to
appear as a menu setting.

Paper Saver
Off
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up

Print multiple pages on one side of a paper.

Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical

Specify the positioning of multiple pages when using Paper Saver.

Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait

Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document.

Paper Saver Border
None
Solid

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• The number selected is the number of pages that will print per side.

Notes:

• Horizontal is the factory default setting.
• Positioning depends on the number of pages and whether they are in portrait
or landscape orientation.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and
landscape.
Print a border when using Paper Saver.
Note: None is the factory default setting.

Quality menu
Use

Print Resolution
300 dpi
600 dpi
1200 dpi
1200 Image Q
2400 Image Q

Specify the printed output resolution in dots per inch.
Note: 600 dpi is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

220

Use

Pixel Boost
Off
Fonts
Horizontally
Vertically
Both directions
Isolated

Enable more pixels to print in clusters for clarity, in order to enhance images horizontally
or vertically, or to enhance fonts.

Toner Darkness
1–10

Lighten or darken the printed output.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• 8 is the factory default setting.
• Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.
Enhance Fine Lines
On
Off

Enable a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps, electrical
circuit diagrams, and flow charts.
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• You can set this option from the printer software. For Windows users, click File >
Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup. For Macintosh
users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and
pop‑up menus.

• To set this option using the Embedded Web Server, type the network printer IP
address in the Web browser address field.
Gray Correction
Auto
Off

Automatically adjust the contrast enhancement applied to images.

Brightness
‑6 to 6

Adjust the printed output either by lightening or darkening it. You can conserve toner
by lightening the output.

Note: Auto is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Contrast
0–5

Adjust the contrast of printed objects.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Job Accounting menu
Note: This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed. Make sure the printer
hard disk is not read/write‑ or write‑protected.
Use

Job Accounting Log
Off
On

Determine and set if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives.

Job Accounting Utilities

Print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

221

Use

Accounting Log Frequency
Weekly
Monthly

Determine and set how often a log file is created.

Log Action at End of Frequency
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log

Determine and set how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires.

Disk Near Full Level
Off
1–99

Specify the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Disk Near
Full Action.

Disk Near Full Action
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current

Determine and set how the printer responds when the printer hard disk is nearly full.

Disk Full Action
None
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current

Determine and set how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum
limit (100MB).

URL to Post Logs

Determine and set where the printer posts job accounting logs.

E‑mail Address to Send Logs

Specify the e‑mail address to which the printer sends job accounting logs.

Log File Prefix

Specify the prefix you want for the log file name.

Note: Monthly is the factory default setting.

Note: None is the factory default setting.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• None is the factory default setting.
• The value defined in Disk Near Full Level determines when this action is
triggered.

Note: None is the factory default setting.

Note: The current host name defined in the TCP/IP menu is used as the default log
file prefix.

Understanding the printer menus

222

Utilities menu
Use

Remove Held Jobs
Confidential
Held
Not Restored
All

Delete confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk.
Notes:

• Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer.
Bookmarks, print jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are not
affected.

• Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the
printer hard disk or memory.
Format Flash
Yes
No

Format the flash memory.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is
being formatted.
Notes:

• Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.
• No cancels the format request.
• Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory card in
the printer.

• The flash memory option card must not be read/write‑ or write‑protected.
• This menu item appears only when a non‑defective flash memory card is
installed.
Delete Downloads on Disk
Delete Now
Do Not Delete

Delete downloads from the printer hard disk, including all held jobs, buffered jobs,
and parked jobs.
Notes:

• Delete Now sets the printer to delete the downloads and allows the display to
return to the originating screen after the deletion.

• Do Not Delete sets the printer display to return to the main Utilities menu for
touch‑screen printer models. When selected in non‑touch‑screen printer
models, Do Not Delete sets the printer to return to the originating screen after
the deletion.
Activate Hex Trace

Assist in isolating the source of a print job problem.
Notes:

• When activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and
character representation, and control codes are not executed.

• To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn off or reset the printer.
Coverage Estimator
Off
On

Provide an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page. The estimate is
printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus

223

XPS menu
Use

Print Error Pages
Off
On

Print a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

PDF menu
Use

Scale to Fit
Yes
No

Scale page content to fit the selected paper size.

Annotations
Do Not Print
Print

Print annotations in a PDF.

Note: No is the factory default setting.

Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.

PostScript menu
Use

Print PS Error
On
Off

Print a page containing the PostScript error.

Lock PS Startup Mode
On
Off

Disable the SysStart file.

Font Priority
Resident
Flash/Disk

Establish the font search order.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Resident is the factory default setting.
• This menu item is available only when a formatted flash memory option
card or printer hard disk is installed and operating properly.

• Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not
read/write‑, write‑, or password‑protected.

• Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100%.

Understanding the printer menus

224

PCL Emul menu
Use

Font Source
Resident
Disk
Download
Flash
All

Specify the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu.
Notes:

• “Resident” is the factory default setting. Resident shows the factory
default set of fonts downloaded in the RAM.

• “Flash” and “Disk” settings show all fonts resident in that option.
• The flash option must be properly formatted and cannot be read/write‑,
write‑, or password‑protected.

• “Download” shows all the fonts downloaded in the RAM.
• “All” shows all fonts available to any option.
Font Name
Courier 10

Identify a specific font and the option where it is stored.

Symbol Set
10U PC‑8
12U PC‑850

Specify the symbol set for each font name.

Note: Courier 10 is the factory default setting. Courier 10 shows the font
name, font ID, and the storage location in the printer. The font source
abbreviation is R for Resident, F for Flash, K for Disk, and D for Download.

Notes:

• 10U PC‑8 is the US factory default setting. 12U PC‑850 is the international
factory default setting.

• A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters, punctuation,
and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different languages or
specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text. Only the
supported symbol sets are shown.
PCL Emulation Settings
Point Size
1.00–1008.00

Change the point size for scalable typographic fonts.
Notes:

• 12 is the factory default setting.
• Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point
equals approximately 0.014 inch.

• Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0.25‑point increments.
PCL Emulation Settings
Pitch
0.08–100

PCL Emulation Settings
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape

Specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts.
Notes:

•
•
•
•

10 is the factory default setting.
Pitch refers to the number of fixed‑space characters per inch (cpi).
Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0.01‑cpi increments.
For nonscalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but it
cannot be changed.

Specify the orientation of text and graphics on the page.
Notes:

• Portrait is the factory default setting. Portrait prints text and graphics
parallel to the short edge of the page.

• Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page.

Understanding the printer menus

225

Use

PCL Emulation Settings
Lines per Page
1–255

Specify the number of lines that print on each page.
Notes:

• 60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default setting.
• The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the
Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the Paper Size
and Orientation you want before setting Lines per Page.

PCL Emulation Settings
A4 Width
198 mm
203 mm

Set the printer to print on A4‑size paper.
Notes:

• “198 mm” is the factory default setting.
• The 203‑mm setting sets the width of the page to allow printing of eighty
10‑pitch characters.

PCL Emulation Settings
Auto CR after LF
On
Off

Specify whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR) after
a line feed (LF) control command.

PCL Emulation Settings
Auto LF after CR
On
Off

Specify whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a
carriage return (CR) control command.

Tray Renumber
Assign MP Feeder
Off
None
0–199
Assign Tray [x]
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Paper
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Env
Off
None
0–199

Configure the printer to work with printer software or programs that use
different source assignments for trays and feeders.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• “Off” is the factory default setting.
• “None” ignores the Select Paper Feed command. This option appears only
when it is selected by the PCL 5 interpreter.

• “0–199” allows a custom setting to be assigned.

Understanding the printer menus

226

Use

Tray Renumber
View Factory Defaults
MPF Default = 8
T1 Default = 1
T1 Default = 4
T1 Default = 5
T1 Default = 20
T1 Default = 21
Env Default = 6
MPaper Default = 2
MEnv Default = 3

Display the factory default setting assigned to each tray or feeder.

Tray Renumber
Restore Defaults
Yes
No

Restore all tray and feeder assignments to the factory default settings.

HTML menu
Use
Font Name
Albertus MT
Antique Olive
Apple Chancery
Arial MT
Avant Garde
Bodoni
Bookman
Chicago
Clarendon
Cooper Black
Copperplate
Coronet
Courier
Eurostile
Garamond
Geneva
Gill Sans
Goudy
Helvetica
Hoefler Text
Intl CG Times
Intl Courier
Intl Univers

To
Joanna MT
Letter Gothic
Lubalin Graph
Marigold
MonaLisa Recut
Monaco
New CenturySbk
New York
Optima
Oxford
Palatino
StempelGaramond
Taffy
Times
TimesNewRoman
Univers
Zapf Chancery
NewSansMTCS
NewSansMTCT
New SansMTJA
NewSansMTKO

Set the default font for HTML documents.
Note: The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not
specify a font.

Understanding the printer menus

227

Use

Font Size
1–255 pt

Set the default font size for HTML documents.
Notes:

• 12 pt is the factory default setting.
• Font size can be increased in 1‑point increments.
Scale
1–400%

Scale the default font for HTML documents.
Notes:

• 100% is the factory default setting.
• Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape

Set the page orientation for HTML documents.

Margin Size
8–255 mm

Set the page margin for HTML documents.

Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• 19 mm is the factory default setting.
• Margin size can be increased in 1‑mm increments.
Backgrounds
Do Not Print
Print

Specify whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents.
Note: Print is the factory default setting.

Image menu
Use

Auto Fit
On
Off

Select the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation.

Invert
On
Off

Invert bitonal monochrome images.

Scaling
Anchor Top Left
Best Fit
Anchor Center
Fit Height/Width
Fit Height
Fit Width

Scale the image to fit the selected paper size.

Note: On is the factory default setting. It overrides scaling and orientation settings
for some images.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.
Notes:

• Best Fit is the factory default setting.
• When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.

Understanding the printer menus

228

Use

Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Reverse Portrait
Reverse Landscape

Set the image orientation.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.

Help menu
The Help menu consists of a series of Help pages that are stored in the multifunction printer (MFP) as PDF files. They
contain information about using the printer and performing various tasks, including copying, scanning, and faxing.
English, French, German, and Spanish translations are stored in the printer. Other translations are available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Menu item

Description

Print All Guides

Prints all the guides

Copy Guide

Provides information about making copies and changing settings

E‑mail Guide

Provides information about sending e‑mails using addresses, shortcut numbers, or
the address book, and about changing settings

Fax Guide

Provides information about sending faxes using fax numbers, shortcut numbers,
or the address book, and about changing settings

FTP Guide

Provides information about scanning documents directly to an FTP server using an
FTP address, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings

Print Defects Guide

Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints

Information Guide

Provides help in locating additional information

Supplies Guide

Provides part numbers for ordering supplies

Saving money and the environment

229

Saving money and the environment
Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact
on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce materials, and provide
collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:

• The Notices chapter
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
• The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This chapter
outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.

Saving paper and toner
Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can significantly
reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such as printing on both
sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.
To quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting, use Eco-Mode.

Using recycled paper
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for
use in laser/LED printers. For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer, see “Using recycled
paper and other office papers” on page 88.

Conserving supplies
Use both sides of the paper
If your printer model supports duplex printing, then you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the
paper by selecting 2‑sided printing from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar.

Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by
selecting a setting from the Multipage printing (N‑Up) section of the Print dialog screen.

Check your first draft for accuracy
Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:

• Use the preview feature, which you can select from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar to see how the
document will look like before you print it.

• Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.

Avoid paper jams
Correctly set the paper type and size to avoid paper jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 256.

Saving money and the environment

230

Saving energy
Using Eco‑Mode
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Eco‑Mode > select a setting
Use

Off

Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco‑Mode. Off supports the performance
specifications of the printer.

Energy

Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.

• Printer engine motors do not start until it is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before the
first page is printed.

• The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes.
Plain Paper

• Enable the automatic two‑sided (duplex) feature.
• Turn off print log features.

3 Click Submit.

Reducing printer noise
Enable Quiet Mode to reduce printer noise.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Quiet Mode > select a setting

Saving money and the environment

231

Use

Reduce printer noise.
Notes:

• Print jobs are processed at a reduced speed.
• Printer engine motors do not start until a document
is ready to print. There will be a short delay before
the first page is printed.
Off

Use factory default settings.
Note: This setting supports the performance
specifications of the printer.

3 Click Submit.

Adjusting Sleep mode
To save energy, decrease the number of minutes before the printer enters Sleep mode.
Select from 1 to 120 minutes. The factory default setting is 30 minutes.

Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Timeouts.
3 In the Sleep Mode field, enter the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep mode.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Sleep Mode

2 In the Sleep Mode field, select the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep mode,
and then touch Submit.

Saving money and the environment

232

Using Hibernate mode
Hibernate is an ultra‑low‑power operating mode. When operating in Hibernate mode, the printer is essentially off, and
all other systems and devices are turned off safely.
Note: The Hibernate and Sleep modes can be scheduled.

Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Sleep Button Settings.
3 From the “Press Sleep Button” or “Press and Hold Sleep Button” drop‑down menu, select Hibernate.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings

2 From the “Press Sleep Button” or “Press and Hold Sleep Button” menu, select Hibernate, and then touch Submit.

Adjusting the brightness of the printer display
To save energy, or if you are have trouble reading from the display, adjust the brightness of the display.
Select from 20 to 100. The factory default setting is 100.

Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings.
3 In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
4 Click Submit.

Saving money and the environment

233

Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Screen Brightness

2 In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display, and then touch Submit.

Recycling
Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling. For more information,
see:

• The Notices chapter
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
• The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle

Recycling Lexmark products
To return Lexmark products for recycling:

1 Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country or region from the list.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local
recycling center. Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept.

Recycling Lexmark packaging
Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported
in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of. These
efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource savings.
Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.
The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your
area.
When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle the
box.

Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling
Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both
easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling. One hundred percent
of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling. Boxes used to return
the cartridges are also recycled.

Saving money and the environment

234

To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and
use the prepaid shipping label. You can also do the following:

1 Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 From the Toner Cartridges section, select your country or region.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Securing the printer

235

Securing the printer
Statement of Volatility
Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings, and user data.
Type of memory

Description

Volatile memory

Your printer uses standard random access memory (RAM) to
temporarily buffer user data during simple print jobs.

Non-volatile memory

Your printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory:
EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both types are used to
store the operating system, device settings, network
information, bookmark settings, and embedded solutions.

Hard disk memory

Some printers have a hard disk drive installed. The printer
hard disk is designed for device-specific functionality. This lets
the device retain buffered user data from complex print jobs,
as well as form data, and font data.

Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:

•
•
•
•
•
•

The printer is being decommissioned.
The printer hard disk is being replaced.
The printer is being moved to a different department or location.
The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization.
The printer is being removed from your premises for service.
The printer is being sold to another organization.

Disposing of a printer hard disk
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
In high‑security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored
in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your premises.

• Degaussing—Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data
• Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable
• Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits
Note: Most data can be erased electronically, but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to
physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored.

Erasing volatile memory
The volatile memory (RAM) installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the buffered
data, simply turn off the printer.

Securing the printer

236

Erasing non‑volatile memory
Erase individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions by following these
steps:

1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display, instead of the standard home screen icons.

3 Touch Wipe All Settings.
The printer restarts several times during this process.
Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, and passwords from the printer
memory.

4 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.

Erasing printer hard disk memory
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
Configuring Disk Wiping in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential material left by print jobs by securely
overwriting files that have been marked for deletion.

Using the printer control panel
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display.

3 Touch Wipe Disk, and then touch one of the following:
• Wipe disk (fast)—This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.
• Wipe disk (secure)—This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by a
verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22‑M standard for securely erasing data
from a printer hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.

4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:

• A status bar indicates the progress of the disk wiping task.
• Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable
for other user tasks.

5 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer undergoes a power‑on reset, and then returns to normal operating mode.

Securing the printer

237

Configuring printer hard disk encryption
Enable hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen.
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.

Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Security > Disk Encryption.
Note: Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted, non‑defective printer hard disk is
installed.

3 From the Disk encryption menu, select Enable.
Notes:

• Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.

4 Click Submit.

3 Touch Disk Encryption > Enable.
Note: Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.

4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:

• Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.
• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.

• A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk has been encrypted, the printer
will return to the Enable/Disable screen.

5 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.

Securing the printer

238

Finding printer security information
In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored
in the printer cannot be accessed by unauthorized persons. For more information, visit the
Lexmark security Web page.
You can also see the Embedded Web Server Administrator’s Guide for additional information:

1 Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then click SELECT YOUR PRODUCT.
2 From the “Search by Product Category” section, navigate to Software and Solutions > Other Applications.
3 Click the Manuals tab, and then select the Embedded Web Server Administrator’s Guide.

Maintaining the printer

239

Maintaining the printer
Warning—Potential Damage: Failure to maintain optimum printer performance, or to replace parts and supplies,
may cause damage to your printer.

Cleaning the printer parts
Cleaning the printer
Note: You may need to perform this task after every few months.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer
warranty.

1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the electrical outlet.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before
proceeding.

2 Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder.
3 Remove any dust, lint, and pieces of paper around the printer using a soft brush or vacuum.
4 Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water, and use it to wipe the outside of the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents to prevent damage to the exterior
of the printer.

5 Make sure all areas of the printer are dry before sending a new print job.

Maintaining the printer

Cleaning the scanner glass
Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images.

1 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2 Open the scanner cover.

3 Remove the white underside of the scanner cover.

240

Maintaining the printer

241

4 Open the bottom ADF door.

5 Wipe the ADF scanner glass under the ADF door.
6 Close the bottom ADF door.
7 Place the white underside of the scanner cover on the scanner glass, and then close the scanner cover.

Maintaining the printer

242

8 Wipe the areas shown, and then let them dry.

White underside of the scanner cover

Scanner glass

ADF glass

White underside of the ADF cover

9 Close the scanner cover.

Checking the status of parts and supplies
A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required.

Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel
From the home screen, touch Status/Supplies > View Supplies.

Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server
Note: Make sure the computer and the printer are connected to the same network.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated
by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Device Status > More Details.

Maintaining the printer

243

Ordering parts and supplies
To order parts and supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized
supplies dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com or contact
the place where you purchased the printer.
Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter‑ or A4‑size plain paper.

Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies
Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party supplies
or parts may affect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components. Use of third-party
supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage. Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies or parts is not covered
by the warranty. All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts, and may deliver
unpredictable results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may
damage your Lexmark printer or its associated components.

Estimated number of remaining pages
The estimated number of remaining pages is based on the recent printing history of the printer. Its accuracy may
vary significantly and is dependent on many factors, such as actual document content, print quality settings, and
other printer settings.
The accuracy of the estimated number of remaining pages may decrease when the actual printing consumption is
different from the historical printing consumption. Consider the variable level of accuracy before purchasing or replacing
supplies based on the estimate. Until an adequate print history is obtained on the printer, the estimated cartridge yield is
based on approximately 5% coverage per page.

Ordering a toner cartridge
Notes:

• The estimated cartridge yield is based on approximately 5% coverage per page.
• Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield.
Item

Return Program cartridge

Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge

24B6015

Ordering an imaging unit
Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may cause imaging unit parts to fail prior to exhaustion of
toner.
For more information on replacing the imaging unit, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Part name

Lexmark Return Program

Imaging unit

24B6025

Maintaining the printer

244

Ordering a maintenance kit
To identify the supported fuser type, view the label on the fuser. Do either of the following:

• Remove the toner cartridge and the imaging unit. The two-digit fuser type code (such as 00 or 01) can be seen on
the front of the fuser.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

• Pull down the printer rear door. The two-digit fuser type code (such as 00 or 01) can be seen on the rear of the
fuser.
Notes:

• Using certain types of paper may require more frequent replacement of the maintenance kit.
• The separator roller, fuser, pick roller assembly, and transfer roller are all included in the maintenance kit and
can be individually ordered and replaced if necessary.

• For more information on replacing the parts included in the maintenance kit, see the instruction sheet that
came with each part.

Lexmark Return Program fuser maintenance kit type
Type

Part number

XM5100 Series Return Program fuser maintenance kit Type 00

40X8420

XM5100 Series Return Program fuser maintenance kit Type 01

40X8421

XM5100 Series Return Program fuser maintenance kit Type 02

40X8422

XM5100 Series Return Program fuser maintenance kit Type 03

40X8423

XM5100 Series Return Program fuser maintenance kit Type 04

40X8424

Lexmark regular fuser maintenance kit type
Type

Part number

XM5100 Series regular fuser maintenance kit Type 05

40X8425

XM5100 Series regular fuser maintenance kit Type 06

40X8426

XM5100 Series regular fuser maintenance kit Type 07

40X8427

XM5100 Series regular fuser maintenance kit Type 08

40X8428

XM5100 Series regular fuser maintenance kit Type 09

40X8429

Lexmark roller kit
Part number
XM5100 Series roller kit

40X7706

Lexmark ADF maintenance kit
Part number
XM5100 Series ADF maintenance kit

40X8431

Maintaining the printer

245

Storing supplies
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you
are ready to use them.
Do not expose supplies to:

•
•
•
•
•
•

Direct sunlight
Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)
High humidity above 80%
Salty air
Corrosive gases
Heavy dust

Replacing supplies
Replacing the toner cartridge
1 Lift the front cover, and then pull down the multipurpose feeder door.

1
2

Maintaining the printer

246

2 Pull the cartridge out of the printer using the handle.

3 Unpack the new toner cartridge, then remove the packing material, and then shake the cartridge to redistribute
the toner.

4 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails
inside the printer.
Note: Make sure the cartridge is fully pushed in.

Warning—Potential Damage: When replacing a toner cartridge, do not leave the imaging unit exposed to direct
light for an extended period of time. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

Maintaining the printer

247

5 Close the multipurpose feeder door and the front cover.

2
1

Replacing the imaging unit
1 Lift the front cover, and then pull down the multipurpose feeder door.

1
2

Maintaining the printer

2 Pull out the toner cartridge from the printer using the handle.

3 Lift the green handle, and then pull out the imaging unit from the printer.

248

Maintaining the printer

249

4 Unpack the new imaging unit, and then shake it.

5 Remove all packing material from the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of
future print jobs.

6 Insert the imaging unit into the printer by aligning the arrows on the side rails of the imaging unit with the arrows
on the side rails inside the printer.

Maintaining the printer

250

7 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails
inside the printer.

8 Close the multipurpose feeder door and the front cover.

2
1

Maintaining the printer

251

Moving the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.

Before moving the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:

Maintaining the printer

252

Moving the printer to another location
The printer and its hardware options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:

• Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer.
• Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the hardware
options.

• Keep the printer in an upright position.
• Avoid severe jarring movements.

Shipping the printer
When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.

Managing the printer

253

Managing the printer
Finding advanced networking and administrator information
This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced system
support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software CD or the Embedded Web Server Administrator's Guide at
http://support.lexmark.com.

Checking the virtual display
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Check the virtual display that appears in the top left corner of the screen.
The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel.

Setting up e‑mail alerts
Configure the printer to send you e‑mail alerts when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed
or added, or when there is a paper jam.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings.
3 From the Other Settings menu, click E‑mail Alert Setup.
4 Select the items you want to be notified on, and then type the e‑mail addresses.
5 Click Submit.
Note: For information on setting up the e‑mail server, contact your system support person.

Viewing reports
You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status of the
printer, network, and supplies.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Managing the printer

254

Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.

Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web
Server
You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly low, low, very low, or reach their
end‑of‑life by setting the selectable alerts.
Notes:

• Selectable alerts can be set on the toner cartridge, imaging unit, and maintenance kit.
• All selectable alerts can be set for nearly low, low, and very low supply conditions. Not all selectable alerts can
be set for the end‑of‑life supply condition. E‑mail selectable alert is available for all supply conditions.

• The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts the alert can be set on some supplies for some
supply conditions.

1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Supply Notifications.
3 From the drop‑down menu for each supply, select one of the following notification options:
Notification

Description

Off

The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs.

E‑mail Only

The printer generates an e‑mail when the supply condition is reached. The status of the
supply appears on the menus page and status page.

Warning

The printer displays the warning message and generates an e‑mail about the status of the
supply. The printer does not stop when the supply condition is reached.

Continuable Stop1

The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached, and the user needs
to press a button to continue printing.

Non Continuable Stop1,2

The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached. The supply must be
replaced to continue printing.

The printer generates an e-mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled.

The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage.

4 Click Submit.

Managing the printer

255

Restoring factory default settings
If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before restoring
the factory default settings. For more information, see “Printing a menu settings page” on page 65.
If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings, then perform the Wipe All
Settings option. For more information, see “Erasing non‑volatile memory” on page 236.
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default
settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port menu settings. All
downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not
affected.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Factory Defaults > Restore Now > Submit

Clearing jams

256

Clearing jams
Jam error messages appear on the printer display and include the area of the printer where the jam occurred. When
there is more than one jam, the number of jammed pages is displayed.

Avoiding jams
Load paper properly
• Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
Correct loading of paper

•
•
•
•

Incorrect loading of paper

Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing.
Do not load a tray while the printer is printing. Load it before printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.
Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
Do not slide the paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.

Clearing jams

257

• Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing tightly
against the paper or envelopes.

• Push the tray firmly into the printer after loading paper.

Use recommended paper
• Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
• Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.
• Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading it.

•
•
•
•

Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same tray.
Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel.
Store paper according to manufacturer recommendations.

Understanding jam messages and locations
When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location and information to clear the jam appears on the printer
display. Open the doors, covers, and trays indicated on the display to remove the jam.
Notes:

• When Jam Assist is set to On, the printer flushes blank pages or pages with partial prints to the standard bin
after a jammed page has been cleared. Check your printed output for blank pages.

• When Jam Recovery is set to On or Auto, the printer reprints jammed pages. However, the Auto setting reprints
jammed pages if adequate printer memory is available.

Clearing jams

258

7
1
6
2

5
4
3

Area

Area name

Printer control panel message

What to do

Upper rear door

[x]‑page jam, open upper rear
door. [202]

Open the rear door of the printer, and then remove the
jammed paper.

Upper door and rear
duplex area

[x]‑page jam, open upper and lower Open the rear door of the printer and the rear duplex
rear door. [231‑234]
area, and then remove the jammed paper.

Trays

[x]‑page jam, open tray [x]. [24x]

Duplex area

[x]‑page jam, remove tray 1 to clear Pull out tray 1 completely, then push the front duplex
duplex. [235–239]
flap down, and then remove the jammed paper.

Multipurpose feeder

[x]‑page jam, clear manual
feeder. [250]

Remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder, and
then remove the jammed paper.

Inside the printer

[x]‑page jam, lift front cover to
remove cartridge. [200–201]

Open the front cover and the multipurpose feeder,
then remove the toner cartridge and the imaging unit,
and then remove the jammed paper.

Standard bin

[x]‑page jam, remove standard bin Remove all paper from the standard bin, and then
jam. [203]
remove the jammed paper.

Automatic document [x]page jam, open automatic
feeder (ADF)
feeder top cover. [28y.xx]

Pull out the indicated tray, and then remove the
jammed paper.

Remove all paper from the ADF tray, and then remove
the jammed paper.

Clearing jams

259

[x]‑page jam, lift front cover to remove cartridge. [200–201]
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

1 Lift the front cover, and then pull down the multipurpose feeder door.

1
2

2 Lift the green handle, and then pull out the toner cartridge from the printer.

3 Place the toner cartridge aside.

Clearing jams

260

4 Lift the green handle, and then pull out the imaging unit from the printer.

1
2
5 Place the imaging unit aside on a flat, smooth surface.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of
future print jobs.

6 Pull the jammed paper gently to the right, and then remove it from the printer.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

Warning—Potential Damage: The jammed paper may be covered with toner, which can stain garments and
skin.

Clearing jams

7 Install the imaging unit.

Note: Use the arrows on the side of the printer as a guide.

8 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer, and then push the green handle back into place.

Notes:

• Align the arrows on the guides of the toner cartridge with the arrows in the printer.
• Make sure the cartridge is fully pushed in.

261

Clearing jams

262

9 Close the multipurpose feeder door and the front cover.

2
1

10 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.

[x]‑page jam, open upper rear door. [202]
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

1 Pull down the rear door.

2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

Clearing jams

3 Close the rear door.
4 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.

[x]‑page jam, open upper and lower rear door. [231–234]
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

1 Pull down the rear door.

2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

263

Clearing jams

3 Close the rear door.
4 Push the back of the standard tray.

5 Press down the rear duplex flap, then firmly grasp the jammed paper, and then gently pull the paper out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

264

Clearing jams

265

6 Insert the standard tray.
7 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.

[x]‑page jam, remove standard bin jam. [203]
1 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

Clearing jams

266

2 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.

[x]‑page jam, remove tray 1 to clear duplex. [235–239]
1 Pull out the tray completely.
Note: Lift the tray slightly, and then pull it out.

1
2 Push down the front duplex flap, then firmly grasp the jammed paper, and then gently pull the paper to the right
and out of the printer.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

Clearing jams

267

3 Insert the tray.
4 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.

[x]‑page jam, open tray [x]. [24x]
1 Check which tray is indicated on the printer display, and then pull the tray.

2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

Clearing jams

3 Insert the tray.
4 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.

[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder. [250]
1 From the multipurpose feeder, firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

268

Clearing jams

269

2 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the
edges on a level surface.

3 Reload paper into the multipurpose feeder.
4 Slide the paper guide until it rests lightly against the edge of the paper.

5 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.

Clearing jams

270

[x]‑page jam, open automatic feeder top cover. [28y.xx]
1 Remove all original documents from the ADF tray.
Note: The message is cleared when the pages are removed from the ADF tray.

2 Open the ADF cover.

3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

4 Close the ADF cover.
5 Open the scanner cover.

6 If the jam is in the bottom ADF door or ADF exit bin, then open the bottom ADF door, and then firmly grasp the
jammed paper on each side.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

Clearing jams

271

7 Close the bottom ADF door.
8 Straighten the edges of the original documents, then load the documents into the ADF, and then adjust the paper
guide.

9 From the printer control panel, touch Done to clear the message and continue printing.

Troubleshooting

272

Troubleshooting
Understanding printer messages
Cartridge low [88.xy]
You may need to order a replacement toner cartridge. If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to
clear the message and continue printing.

Cartridge nearly low [88.xy]
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Cartridge very low, [x] estimated pages remain [88.xy]
You may need to replace the toner cartridge very soon. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of
the User’s Guide.
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:

• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the
printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.

• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays.
• Cancel the print job.

Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:

• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the
printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.

• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays.
• Cancel the print job.

Change [paper source] to [paper size] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:

• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the
printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.

• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays.
• Cancel the print job.

Troubleshooting

273

Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:

• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the
printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.

• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays.
• Cancel the print job.

Check tray [x] connection
Try one or more of the following:

• Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
If the error occurs a second time, then:

1
2
3
4
5
6

Turn off the printer.
Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
Remove the indicated tray.
Reattach the tray.
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Turn the printer back on.

If the error occurs again, then:

1
2
3
4

Turn off the printer.
Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
Remove the tray.
Contact customer support.

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and resume the job.

Close door or insert cartridge
The toner cartridge is missing or not installed properly. Insert the cartridge, and then close all doors and covers.

Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job [2yy.xx]
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan
job.

• Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner glass immediately after the last successful scan
job.

• Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
Note: This does not cancel the scan job. All successfully scanned pages will be processed further for copying,
faxing, or e-mailing.

• Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.

Troubleshooting

274

Close front door
Close the front door of the printer.

Close top access cover
Close the printer top access cover to clear the message.

Complex page, some data may not have printed [39]
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to ignore the message and continue printing.
• Cancel current print job.
• Install additional printer memory.

Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored [57]
Held jobs are invalidated because of the following possible changes in the printer:

•
•
•
•

The printer firmware has been updated.
The tray for the print job has been removed.
The print job is sent from a flash drive that is no longer attached to the USB port.
The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored when the hard disk was installed in a different printer
model.

From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.

Defective flash detected [51]
Try one or more of the following:

• Replace the defective flash memory card.
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to ignore the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current print job.

Disk full [62]
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.
• Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity.

Disk full, scan job canceled
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue scanning.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.

Troubleshooting

275

• Install a hard disk with higher capacity.

Disk must be formatted for use in this device
From the printer control panel, touch Format disk to format the printer hard disk and clear the message.
Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored in the printer hard disk.

Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space.
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.
• Install a hard disk with higher capacity.

Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.
An unsupported USB device is inserted. Remove the USB device, and then insert a supported one.

Error reading USB hub. Remove hub.
An unsupported USB hub has been inserted. Remove the USB hub, and then install a supported one.

Fax memory full
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.

Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator.
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on. If the message appears again, then contact your system support
person.

Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Fax Server setup. If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.

Troubleshooting

276

Fax Station Name not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try either of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Analog Fax setup. If the message appears again after completing the setup, then contact your system
support person.

Fax Station Number not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try one or more of the following:

Imaging unit low [84.xy]
You may need to order a replacement imaging unit. If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear
the message and continue printing.

Imaging unit nearly low [84.xy]
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Imaging unit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [84.xy]
You may need to replace the imaging unit very soon. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the
User’s Guide.
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.

Incompatible tray [x] [59]
Try one or more of the following:

• Remove the indicated tray.
• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the
indicated tray.

Incorrect paper size, open [paper source] [34]
Try one or more of the following:

• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, and then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on
the printer control panel.

• Make sure the correct paper size and type are specified in Print Properties or the Print dialog settings.
• Check if the paper size is correctly set. For example, if MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, then make sure the paper
is large enough for the data being printed.

• Check the length and width guides and make sure the paper is loaded properly in the tray.

Troubleshooting

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and print using a different tray.
• Cancel the print job.

Insert Tray [x]
Try one or more of the following:

• Insert the specified tray into the printer.
• Cancel the print job.
• Reset the active bin for a linked set of bins by selecting Reset active bin on the printer control panel.

Install duplex
Try one or more of the following:

• Install the duplex unit:
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Install the duplex unit.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Restart the printer.
• Cancel the current job.
• Reset the active bin.

Install Tray [x]
Try one or more of the following:

• Install the specified tray:
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Install the specified tray.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
• Cancel the print job.
• Reset the active bin.

Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation [37]
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data in the printer memory.
• Install additional printer memory.

277

Troubleshooting

278

Insufficient memory to collate job [37]
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to print the part of the job already stored and begin collating the
rest of the print job.

• Cancel the current print job.

Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature [35]
Install additional printer memory or touch Continue to disable Resource Save, clear the message, and continue printing.

Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted [37]
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.

Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored [37]
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Delete other held jobs to free up additional printer memory.

Load [paper source] with [custom string] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:

• Load the indicated tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• To use the tray with the correct paper size or type, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.
Note: If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it feeds from that tray. If the
printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default paper source.

• Cancel the current job.

Load [paper source] with [custom type name] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:

• Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• To use the tray with the correct paper size or type, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.
Note: If the printer detects a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it feeds from that tray. If the
printer cannot detect a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it prints from the default paper
source.

• Cancel the current job.

Troubleshooting

279

Load [paper source] with [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:

• Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct size of paper.
• To use the tray or feeder with the correct size of paper, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.
Note: If the printer finds a tray or feeder that has the correct size of paper, then it feeds from that tray or
feeder. If the printer cannot find a tray or feeder with the correct size of paper, then it prints from the default
paper source.

• Cancel the current job.

Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:

• Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• To use the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control
panel.
Note: If the printer finds a tray or feeder that has the correct size and type of paper, then it feeds from that tray
or feeder. If the printer cannot find a tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper, then it prints from
the default paper source.

• Cancel the current job.

Load Manual Feeder with [custom string] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:

• Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear
the message and continue printing.

• From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.

Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.

Troubleshooting

280

Load Manual Feeder with [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:

• Load the feeder with the correct size of paper.
• From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear
the message and continue printing.

• From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.

Load Manual Feeder with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.

Maintenance kit low [80.xy]
You may need to order a maintenance kit. For more information, contact customer support at
http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative. If necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and
continue printing.

Maintenance kit nearly low [80.xy]
For more information, contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative. If
necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

Maintenance kit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [80.xy]
You may need to replace the maintenance kit very soon. For more information, contact customer support at
http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative. If necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and
continue printing.

Memory full [38]
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Cancel job to clear the message.
• Install additional printer memory.

Memory full, cannot print faxes
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message without printing. Held faxes attempt to print after
the printer is restarted.

Troubleshooting

281

Memory full, cannot send faxes
1 From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and cancel the fax job.
2 Try one or more of the following:
• Reduce the fax resolution, and then resend the fax job.
• Reduce the number of pages in the fax, and then resend the fax job.

Network [x] software error [54]
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
• Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, contact customer support.

No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled.
Connect the printer to an analog phone line.

Non‑Lexmark [supply type], see User’s Guide [33.xy]
Note: The supply type can be toner cartridge, imaging unit, or fuser.
The printer has detected a non‑Lexmark supply or part installed in the printer.
Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party supplies
or parts may affect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components.
All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts, and may deliver unpredictable results if
third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark
printer or associated components.
Warning—Potential Damage: Use of third-party supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage. Damage caused by
the use of third-party supplies or parts may not be covered by the warranty.
To accept any and all of these risks, and to proceed with the use of non-genuine supplies or parts in your printer, touch
and hold
printing.

and the # on the printer control panel simultaneously for 15 seconds to clear the message and continue

If you do not want to accept these risks, then remove the third-party supply or part from your printer, and then install
a genuine Lexmark supply or part.
Note: For the list of supported supplies, see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User's Guide or visit
www.lexmark.com.

Not enough free space in flash memory for resources [52]
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the flash memory.

Troubleshooting

• Install a flash memory card with larger capacity.
Note: Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in the flash memory are deleted.

Paper changes needed
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Use current supplies to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current print job.

Parallel port [x] disabled [56]
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Enable the parallel port. From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Network/Ports > Parallel [x] > Parallel Buffer > Auto
Note: The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.

Printer had to restart. Last job may be incomplete.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
For more information, visit http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support.

Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge [31.xy]
Try one or more of the following:

• Check if the toner cartridge is missing. If missing, install the toner cartridge.
For information on installing the cartridge, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.

• If the toner cartridge is installed, then remove the unresponsive toner cartridge, and then reinstall it.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then the cartridge is defective. Replace the toner
cartridge.

Reinstall missing or unresponsive imaging unit [31.xy]
Try one or more of the following:

• Check if the imaging unit is missing. If missing, install the imaging unit.
For information on installing the imaging unit, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.

• If the imaging unit is installed, then remove the unresponsive imaging unit, and then reinstall it.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then the imaging unit is defective. Replace the
imaging unit.

282

Troubleshooting

283

Remove defective disk [61]
Remove and replace the defective printer hard disk.

Remove packaging material, [area name]
Remove any remaining packaging material from the specified location.

Remove paper from standard output bin
Remove the paper stack from the standard bin.

Replace all originals if restarting job.
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan
job.

• Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful scan job.
• Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
• Touch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.

Replace cartridge, 0 estimated pages remain [88.xy]
Replace the toner cartridge to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
visit www.lexmark.com.

Replace cartridge, printer region mismatch [42.xy]
Install a toner cartridge that matches the region number of the printer. x indicates the value of the printer region. y
indicates the value of the cartridge region. x and y can have the following values:

Printer and toner cartridge regions
Region number

Region

Global

United States, Canada

European Economic Area (EEA), Switzerland

Asia Pacific, Australia, New Zealand

Latin America

Africa, Middle East, rest of Europe

Invalid

Troubleshooting

284

Notes:

• The x and y values represent .xy in the code that appears on the printer control panel.
• The x and y values must match for printing to continue.

Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated pages remain [84.xy]
Replace the imaging unit to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
visit www.lexmark.com.

Replace jammed originals if restarting job.
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan
job.

Replace last scanned page and jammed originals if restarting job.
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan
job.

Replace maintenance kit, 0 estimated pages remain [80.xy]
Contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative, and then report the message.
The printer is scheduled for maintenance.

Replace missing fuser [80.xx]
1 Install the missing fuser. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
2 From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.

Troubleshooting

285

Replace separator pad
Try one or more of the following:

• Replace the separator pad. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
• From the printer control panel, touch Ignore to clear the message.

Replace unsupported cartridge [32.xy]
Remove the toner cartridge, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s
Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
visit www.lexmark.com.

Replace unsupported imaging unit [32.xy]
Remove the imaging unit, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s
Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
visit www.lexmark.com.

Replace wiper
Try one or more of the following:

• Replace the fuser wiper in the printer.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

Restore held jobs?
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Restore to restore all held jobs stored in the printer hard disk.
• From the printer control panel, touch Do not restore if you do not want to restore any of the print jobs.

Scan document too long
The scan job exceeds the maximum number of pages. Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.

Scanner automatic feeder cover open
Close the ADF cover.

Scanner disabled by admin [840.01]
Print without the scanner, or contact your system support person.

Troubleshooting

286

Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists. [840.02]
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen, and then contact your system support person.
• Touch Reboot and automatically enable scanner to cancel the job.
Note: This attempts to enable the scanner.

Scanner jam, remove all originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]
Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.

Scanner jam, remove jammed originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]
Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.

Scanner maintenance required soon, use ADF Kit [80]
Contact customer support, and then report the message. The printer is scheduled for maintenance.

Serial option [x] error [54]
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.
• Check that the serial cable is properly connected and is the correct one for the serial port.
• Check that the serial interface parameters (protocol, baud, parity, and data bits) are set correctly on the printer
and computer.

• Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.

Serial port [x] disabled [56]
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the specified serial port.

• Make sure Serial Buffer is not set to Disabled.
• From the printer control panel, set Serial Buffer to Auto in the Serial [x] menu.

Some held jobs were not restored
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to delete the indicated job.
Note: Held jobs that are not restored remain in the printer hard disk and are inaccessible.

Troubleshooting

Standard network software error [54]
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
• Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, contact customer support.

Standard USB port disabled [56]
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
• Enable the USB port. From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Network/Ports > USB Buffer > Auto
Note: The printer discards any data received through the USB port.

Supply needed to complete job
Do either of the following:

• Install the missing supply to complete the job.
• Cancel the current job.

Too many disks installed [58]
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the extra printer hard disks.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.

Too many flash options installed [58]
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the extra flash memory.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.

Too many trays attached [58]
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.

287

Troubleshooting

288

3 Remove the extra trays.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.

Tray [x] paper size unsupported
Replace with a supported paper size.

Unformatted flash detected [53]
Try one or more of the following:

• From the printer control panel, touch Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing.
• Format the flash memory.
Note: If the error message remains, then the flash memory may be defective and needs to be replaced.

Unsupported camera mode, unplug camera and change mode
The camera mode does not support PictBridge.
Unplug the camera, change the mode and plug the camera back into the printer.

Unsupported disk
Remove the unsupported printer hard disk, and then insert a supported one.

Unsupported option in slot [x] [55]
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer controller board, and then replace it with a supported card.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.

USB port [x] disabled [56]
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Notes:

• The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
• Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.

Troubleshooting

289

Weblink server not set up. Contact system administrator.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Note: If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.

Solving printer problems
• “Basic printer problems” on page 289
• “Hardware and internal option problems” on page 291
• “Paper feed problems” on page 294

Basic printer problems
The printer is not responding
Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

Turn on the printer.

Make sure the printer is turned on.
Is the printer turned on?
Step 2
Check if the printer is in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
Is the printer in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode?
Step 3

Press the Sleep button Go to step 3.
to wake the printer
from Sleep mode or
Hibernate mode.
Go to step 4.

Plug one end of the
power cord into the
printer and the other to
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.

Unplug the other
electrical equipment,
and then turn on the
printer. If the printer
does not work, then
reconnect the other
electrical equipment.

Go to step 5.

Go to step 6.

Make sure to match the
following:

Check if one end of the power cord is plugged into the printer and the
other to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Step 4
Check other electrical equipment plugged into the electrical outlet.
Does other electrical equipment work?

Step 5
Check if the cables connecting the printer and the computer are inserted
in the correct ports.
Are the cables inserted in the correct ports?

• The USB symbol on
the cable with the
USB symbol on the
printer

• The appropriate
Ethernet cable with
the Ethernet port

Troubleshooting

290

Action

Yes

Step 6

Turn on the switch or
reset the breaker.

Go to step 7.

Make sure the electrical outlet is not turned off by a switch or breaker.
Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker?
Step 7

Connect the printer
Go to step 8.
power
cord
directly
to
Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible
a properly grounded
power supplies, or extension cords.
electrical outlet.
Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power
supplies, or extension cords?
Step 8

Go to step 9.

Connect the printer
cable securely to the
printer and the
computer, print server,
option, or other
network device.

Go to step 10.

Turn off the printer,
remove all packing
materials, then
reinstall the hardware
options, and then turn
on the printer.

Check if one end of the printer cable is plugged into a port on the printer
and the other to the computer, print server, option, or other network
device.
Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer,
print server, option, or other network device?
Step 9
Make sure to install all hardware options properly and remove any packing
material.
Are all hardware options properly installed and all packing material
removed?
Step 10
Go to step 11.
Check if you have selected the correct port settings in the printer driver.

Use correct printer
driver settings.

Are the port settings correct?
Step 11
Check the installed printer driver.

Go to step 12.

Install the correct
printer driver.

Is the correct printer driver installed?
Step 12
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
Is the printer working?

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Troubleshooting

291

Printer display is blank
Action

Yes

Step 1

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Press the Sleep button on the printer control panel.
Does Ready appear on the printer display?
Step 2
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.

The problem is solved. Turn off the printer,
and then contact
customer support.

Do Please wait and Ready appear on the printer display?

Hardware and internal option problems
Cannot detect internal option
Action

Yes

Step 1

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
printer.
Does the internal option operate correctly?
Step 2

Go to step 3.

Connect the internal
option to the controller
board.

Go to step 4.

Reinstall the internal
option.

Check if the internal option is properly installed in the controller board.
a Turn off the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet.
b Make sure the internal option is installed in the appropriate connector
in the controller board.
c Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded
electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
Is the internal option properly installed in the controller board?
Step 3
Print a menu settings page, and then check to see if the internal option is
listed in the Installed Features list.
Is the internal option listed in the menu settings page?

Troubleshooting

292

Action

Yes

Step 4
a Check if the internal option is selected.

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

It may be necessary to manually add the internal option in the printer
driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see
“Updating available options in the printer driver” on page 56.
b Resend the print job.
Does the internal option operate correctly?

Internal print server does not operate correctly
Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

Check if the internal
print server is
supported by the
printer.

Reinstall the internal print server.
a Remove, and then install the internal print server. For more
information, see “Installing an Internal Solutions Port” on page 37.
b Print a menu settings page, and then check if the internal print server
is listed in the Installed Features list.

Note: An internal print
server from another
printer may not work
with this printer.

Is the internal print server listed in the Installed Features list?
Step 2
Check the cable and the internal print server connection.
Use the correct cable, and then check if it is securely connected to the
internal print server.

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Does the internal print server operate correctly?

Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly
Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

Check if you have a
supported ISP.

Make sure the Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed.
a Install the ISP. For more information, see “Installing an Internal
Solutions Port” on page 37.
b Print a menu settings page, and then check if the ISP is listed in the
Installed Features list.
Is the ISP listed in the Installed Features list?

Note: An ISP from
another printer may
not work on this
printer.

Troubleshooting

293

Action

Yes

Step 2

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Check the cable and the ISP connection.
a Use the correct cable, and then make sure it is securely connected to
the ISP.
b Check if the ISP solution interface cable is securely connected into the
receptacle of the controller board.

Note: The ISP solution interface cable and the receptacle on the
controller board are color‑coded.
Does the Internal Solutions Port operate correctly?

Tray problems
Action

Yes

Step 1
a Pull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

• Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
• Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned
with the paper size indicators on the tray.

• If you are printing on custom‑size paper, then make sure that the
paper guides rest against the edges of the paper.

• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
• Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
b Check if the tray closes properly.
Is the tray working?
Step 2
a Turn off the printer, then wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
b Resend the print job.

The problem is solved. Go to step 3.

Is the tray working?
Step 3
Check if the tray is installed and recognized by the printer.
Print a menu settings page, and then check if the tray is listed in the
Installed Features list.
Is the tray listed in the menu settings page?

Go to step 4.

Reinstall the tray. For
more information, see
the setup
documentation that
came with the tray.

Troubleshooting

294

Action

Yes

Step 4

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Check if the tray is available in the printer driver.

Note: If necessary, manually add the tray in the printer driver to make it
available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating available
options in the printer driver” on page 56.
Is the tray available in the printer driver?

USB/parallel interface card does not operate correctly
Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

Check if you have a
supported USB or
parallel interface card.

Make sure the USB or parallel interface card is installed.
a Install the USB or parallel interface card. For more information, see
“Installing an Internal Solutions Port” on page 37.
b Print a menu settings page, and then check if the USB or parallel
interface card is listed in the Installed Features list.

Note: A USB or parallel
interface card from
another printer may
not work on this
printer.

Is the USB or parallel interface card listed in the Installed Features list?
Step 2
Check the cable and the USB or parallel interface card connection.
Use the correct cable, and then make sure it is securely connected to
the USB or parallel interface card.

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Does the USB or parallel interface card operate correctly?

Paper feed problems
Jammed pages are not reprinted
Action

Yes

Turn on Jam Recovery.
a From the home screen, navigate to:

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

> Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery

b From the Jam Recovery menu, touch the arrows to scroll to On or
Auto.
c Touch Submit.
Do pages reprint after a jam?

Troubleshooting

295

Paper frequently jams
Action

Yes

Step 1
a Pull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:

Go to step 2.

The problem is solved.

Go to step 3.

The problem is solved.

• Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
• Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned
with the paper size indicators on the tray.

• Check if the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the
paper.

• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
• Check if you are printing on a recommended paper size and type.
b Insert the tray properly.
If jam recovery is enabled, then the print jobs will reprint
automatically.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Step 2
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Step 3
Contact customer
support.
a Review the tips on avoiding jams. For more information, see “Avoiding
jams” on page 256.
b Follow the recommendations, and then resend the print job.

The problem is solved.

Do paper jams still occur frequently?

Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared
Action

Yes

Check the entire paper path for jammed paper.
a Remove any jammed paper.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

b From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Does the paper jam message remain?

Troubleshooting

296

Solving print problems
Printing problems
Confidential and other held jobs do not print
Note: Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

Select one of the Print
and Hold options, and
then resend the print
job. For more
information, see
“Printing confidential
and other held jobs” on
page 98.

Open the held jobs folder on the printer display, and then verify that your
print job is listed.
Is your print job listed in the held jobs folder?

Step 2
The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.

The problem is solved. Go to step 3.

• Delete the print job, and then send it again.
• For PDF files, generate a new PDF, and then print it again.
If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading
multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting all jobs except the first one.
For Windows users
a Open the Print Properties folder.

b From the Print and Hold dialog, select the “Keep duplicate documents”
check box.
c Enter a PIN number.
For Macintosh users
Save each print job, name each job differently, and then send the
individual jobs to the printer.
Does the job print?
Step 3
Free up additional printer memory by deleting some of the held jobs.
Does the job print?

The problem is solved. Add additional printer
memory.

Troubleshooting

297

Envelope seals when printing
Action

Yes

Contact customer
support.
Note: Printing on envelopes with high moisture content can seal the
flaps.
b Resend the print job.

a Use envelopes that have been stored in a dry environment.

No
The problem is solved.

Does the envelope seal when printing?

Error message about reading the flash drive appears
Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

Insert the flash drive
into the front USB port.

Check if the flash drive is inserted into the front USB port.
Note: The flash drive will not work if it is inserted into the rear USB
port.
Is the flash drive inserted into the front USB port?
Step 2

Wait until the printer is Go to step 3.
Check if the indicator light on the printer control panel is blinking green. ready, then view the
held jobs list, and then
Note: A green blinking light indicates that the printer is busy.
print the documents.
Is the indicator light blinking green?
Step 3
a Check for an error message on the display.

Go to step 4.

The problem is solved.

Go to step 5.

The problem is solved.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

b Clear the message.
Does the error message still appear?
Step 4
Check if the flash drive is supported.
For more information on tested and approved USB flash drives, see
“Supported flash drives and file types” on page 96.
Does the error message still appear?
Step 5
Check if the USB port is disabled by the system support person.
Does the error message still appear?

Troubleshooting

298

Incorrect characters print
Action

Yes

Step 1

Deactivate Hex Trace
mode.

Go to step 2.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

Action

Yes

Step 1
a Check if you are printing on paper that is supported by the tray.

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode.
Note: If Ready Hex appears on the printer display, then turn off the
printer, and then turn it back on to deactivate Hex Trace mode.
Is the printer in Hex Trace mode?
Step 2
a From the printer control panel, select Standard Network or
Network [x], and then set SmartSwitch to On.
b Resend the print job.
Do incorrect characters print?

Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper

b Resend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
Step 2
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
a From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper size
and type to match the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, open Printing Preferences or
the Print dialog, and then specify the paper type.
b Resend the print job.

The problem is solved. Go to step 4.

Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
Step 4
a Check if the trays are not linked.

b Resend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Troubleshooting

299

Large jobs do not collate
Action

Yes

Step 1
a From the Finishing menu on the printer control panel, set Collate to
(1,2,3) (1,2,3).
b Resend the print job.

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Did the job print and collate correctly?
Step 2
a From the printer software, set Collate to (1,2,3) (1,2,3).

The problem is solved. Go to step 3.

Note: Setting Collate to (1,1,1) (2,2,2) in the software overrides the
setting in the Finishing menu.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
Step 3
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size
of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages
in the job.

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Did the job print and collate correctly?

Multiple‑language PDF files do not print
Action

Yes

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 1
a Check if the print options for the PDF output are set to embed all fonts.
For more information, see the documentation that came with Adobe
Acrobat.
b Generate a new PDF file, and then resend the print job.
Do the files print?
Step 2
a Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.

b Click File > Print > Advanced > Print As Image > OK > OK.
Do the files print?

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Troubleshooting

300

Print jobs do not print
Action

Yes

Step 1
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
a From the document you are trying to print, open the Print dialog and
check if you have selected the correct printer.
Note: If the printer is not the default printer, then you must select
the printer for each document that you want to print.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 2
a Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready appears
on the printer display.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
Step 3
The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
If an error message appears on the printer display, then clear the message.
Note: The printer continues to print after clearing the message.
Do the jobs print?
Step 4
a Check if the ports (USB, serial, or Ethernet) are working and if the
cables are securely connected to the computer and the printer.

The problem is solved. Go to step 5.

Note: For more information, see the setup documentation that
came with the printer.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 6.
Step 5
a Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
Step 6
a Remove, and then reinstall the printer software. For more
information, see “Installing the printer software” on page 55.
Note: The printer software is available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Troubleshooting

301

Print job takes longer than expected
Action

Yes

Step 1

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Change the environmental settings of the printer.
a From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings
b Select Eco‑Mode or Quiet Mode, and then select Off.
Note: Disabling Eco-Mode or Quiet Mode may increase the
consumption of energy or supplies, or both.
Did the job print?
Step 2

The problem is solved. Go to step 3.

Reduce the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of
images, and the number of pages in the print job, and then resend the job
Did the job print?
Step 3
a Remove held jobs stored in the printer memory.

The problem is solved. Go to step 4.

b Resend the print job.
Did the job print?
Step 4
a Disable the Page Protect feature.

The problem is solved. Go to step 5.

From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Page Protect > Off
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 6.
Step 5
a Check if the cable connections to the printer and print server are
secure. For more information, see the setup documentation that came
with the printer.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print?
Step 6
Install additional printer memory, and then resend the print job.
Did the job print?

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Troubleshooting

302

Printing slows down
Notes:

• When printing using narrow paper, the printer prints at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser.
• The printer speed may be reduced when printing for long periods of time, or printing at elevated temperatures.
Action

Yes

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 1
a Make sure the size of the paper loaded in the tray matches the fuser
type.
Note: Use a 110-volt fuser for printing on letter-size paper and a
220-volt fuser for printing on A4‑size paper.
b Resend the print job.
Does the print speed increase?
Step 2
a Replace the fuser. For more information on installing the fuser, see
the instruction sheet that came with the part.
b Resend the print job.

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Does the print speed increase?

Tray linking does not work
Notes:

• The trays can detect paper length.
• The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect the paper size. You must set the size from the Paper
Size/Type menu.
Action

Yes

Step 1
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
a Open the trays, and then check if they contain paper of the same size
and type.

• Check if the paper guides are in the correct positions for the size
of the paper loaded in each tray.

• Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned
with the paper size indicators on the tray.
b Resend the print job.
Do the trays link correctly?

Troubleshooting

Action

303

Yes

The problem is solved. Contact customer
Step 2
support.
a From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the trays to be linked.
Note: The paper size and type must match for trays to be linked.
b Resend the print job.
Do the trays link correctly?

Unexpected page breaks occur
Action

Yes

Increase the printing timeout.
a From the home screen, navigate to:

The problem is solved. Check the original file
for manual page
breaks.

> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts
b Increase the Print Timeout setting, and then touch Submit.

c Resend the print job.
Did the file print correctly?

Print quality problems
Characters have jagged or uneven edges

Troubleshooting

304

Action

Yes

Step 1
Go to step 2.
a Print a font sample list to check if the fonts you are using are supported
by the printer.
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:

No
The problem is solved.

> Reports > Print Fonts
2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.

b Use a font that is supported by the printer or install the font that you
want to use. For more information, contact your system support
person.
c Resend the print job.
Do prints still contain characters that have jagged or uneven edges?
Contact customer
Step 2
a Use a font that is supported by the printer or install the font that you support.
want to use on your computer. For more information, contact your
system support person.
b Resend the print job.

The problem is solved.

Do prints still contain characters that have jagged or uneven edges?

Clipped pages or images
Leading edge

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Trailing edge

Action

Yes

Step 1
Go to step 2.
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the paper loaded.
b Resend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?

No
The problem is solved.

Troubleshooting

305

Action

Yes

Step 2

Go to step 3.

Do one or more of the
following:

From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.

• Specify the paper
size from the tray
settings to match
the paper loaded in
the tray.

Do the paper size and type match the paper loaded in the tray?

• Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
size specified in the
tray settings.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size from
Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.

Go to step 4.

The problem is solved.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

Is the page or image clipped?
Step 4
a Reinstall the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge.

2 Remove the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
3 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.

b Resend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?

Compressed images appear on prints
Note: Printing on letter-size paper using a 220-volt fuser compresses images.
Action

Yes

Troubleshooting

306

Action

Yes

Step 2
a Replace the fuser. For more information on installing the fuser, see
the instruction sheet that came with the part.
b Resend the print job.

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Do compressed images still appear?

Gray background on prints
Leading edge

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE

Trailing edge

Action

Yes

Step 1
a From the Quality Menu on the printer control panel, decrease the
toner darkness.

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Note: 8 is the factory default setting.

b Resend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear from the prints?
Step 2

The problem is solved. Go to step 3.

Reinstall the imaging unit and the toner cartridge.
a Remove the toner cartridge.

b Remove the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light
can cause print quality problems.
c Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.

d Resend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear from the prints?
Step 3
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear from the prints?

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Troubleshooting

307

Horizontal voids appear on prints
Leading edge

Trailing edge

Action

Yes

Step 1
a Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.

Go to step 2.

The problem is solved.

Step 2
Go to step 3.
a Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper.

The problem is solved.

b Resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?

b Resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Step 3
a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.

Go to step 4.

The problem is solved.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

2 Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
3 Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.

b Resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Step 4
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?

Troubleshooting

308

Incorrect margins on prints

ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
Action

Yes

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 1
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the paper size loaded.
b Resend the print job.
Are the margins correct?
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper size in the Paper menu to
match the paper loaded in the tray.
Does the paper size match the paper loaded in the tray?

Go to step 3.

Do one or more of the
following:

• Specify the paper
size from the tray
settings to match
the paper loaded in
the tray.

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Troubleshooting

309

Paper curl
Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

Adjust the width and
length guides.

Go to step 3.

Specify the paper type
and weight from the
tray settings to match
the paper loaded in the
tray.

Go to step 4.

The problem is solved.

Go to step 5.

The problem is solved.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for
the size of the paper loaded.
Are the width and length guides positioned correctly?
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in
the tray?
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type and
weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Step 4
a Remove the paper from the tray, and then turn it over.

b Resend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Step 5
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?

Printer is printing blank pages

Troubleshooting

310

Action

Yes

Step 1
a Check if there is packing material left on the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.

Go to step 2.

The problem is solved.

Go to step 3.

The problem is solved.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

2 Check if the packing material is properly removed from the imaging
unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
3 Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.

b Resend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Step 2
a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.

b Resend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Step 3
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?

Printer is printing solid black pages

Troubleshooting

311

Action

Yes

Step 1
a Reinstall the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.

Go to step 2.

The problem is solved.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

Yes

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
2 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.

b Resend the print job.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?
Step 2
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?

Print irregularities
Leading edge

)
)
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE

Trailing edge

Action

Step 1
Go to step 2.
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the size of the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.

The problem is solved.

Do print irregularities still appear?
Step 2

Go to step 3.

Specify the paper size
and type from the tray
settings to match the
paper loaded in the
tray.

Go to step 4.

The problem is solved.

From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the printer settings match the type and weight of the paper loaded in
the tray?
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type and
weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?

Troubleshooting

312

Action

Yes

Step 4

From the printer
Go to step 5.
control panel, set the
paper texture in the
Paper menu to match
the paper loaded in the
tray.

Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?

Step 5
a Load paper from a fresh package.

Go to step 6.

The problem is solved.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Step 6
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?

The problem is solved.
Contact customer
support at
http://support.lexmar
k.com or your service
representative.

Print is too dark

Action

Yes

Go to step 2.
Step 1
a From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, reduce the toner
darkness.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?

No
The problem is solved.

Troubleshooting

Action

313

Yes

Go to step 3.
Step 2
a From the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture and weight
in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?

No
Do one or more of the
following:

• Specify the paper
type, texture, and
weight from the
tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.

• Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
type, texture and
weight specified in
the tray settings.
Go to step 4.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.

The problem is solved.

Is the print still too dark?
Step 4
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?

Step 5
a Load paper from a fresh package.

From the printer
Go to step 5.
control panel, change
the texture settings in
the Paper Texture
menu to match the
paper you are printing
on.
Go to step 6.

The problem is solved.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Step 6
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?

Troubleshooting

314

Print is too light

Action

Yes

Go to step 2.
Step 1
a From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, increase the toner
darkness.

No
The problem is solved.

Note: 8 is the factory default setting.

b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 3.

Change the paper type,
texture, and weight to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.

Go to step 4.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture,
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.

The problem is solved.

Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture, and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?

Is the print still too light?
Step 4
Make sure that the paper has no texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?

Step 5
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?

From the printer
Go to step 5.
control panel, change
the texture settings in
the Paper Texture
menu to match the
paper you are printing
on.
Go to step 6.

The problem is solved.

Troubleshooting

315

Action

Yes

Step 6
a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.

Go to step 7.

The problem is solved.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

Yes

b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Step 7
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?

Repeating defects appear on prints

Action

Step 1
Go to step 2.
a Replace the imaging unit if the distance between the defects is equal
to any of the following:

The problem is solved.

• 47.8 mm (1.88 in.)
• 96.8 mm (3.81 in.)
• 28.5 mm (1.12 in.)
b Resend the print job.
Do repeating defects still appear on prints?
Contact customer
Step 2
a Replace the fuser if the distance between the defects is equal to either support.
of the following:

• 94.25 mm (3.71 in.)
• 95.2 mm (3.75 in.)
b Resend the print job.
Do repeating defects still appear on prints?

The problem is solved.

Troubleshooting

316

Shadow images appear on prints
Leading edge

A
AB
BC
CD
D
A
B
C
D
ABCD
Trailing edge

Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

Load paper with the
correct paper type and
weight in the tray.

Go to step 3.

Change the paper
loaded in the tray to
match the paper type
and weight specified in
the tray settings.

Go to step 4.

The problem is solved.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

Load paper with the correct paper type and weight in the tray.
Is paper with the correct paper type and weight loaded in the tray?
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the tray set to the type and weight of the paper loaded?
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type and
weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Do shadow images still appear on prints?
Step 4
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do shadow images still appear on prints?

Skewed print

)E
) D
ABC
E
ABCD E
ABCD

Troubleshooting

Action

317

Yes

Step 1
Go to step 2.
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the size of the paper loaded.
b Resend the print job.

No
The problem is solved.

Is the print still skewed?
Step 2
a Check if you are printing on a paper that is supported by the tray.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

Yes

b Resend the print job.
Is the print still skewed?

Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action

Step 1
Go to step 2.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the tray or feeder from
Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.

The problem is solved.

Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Step 2

Go to step 3.

Change the paper type
and weight to match
the paper loaded in the
tray.

Go to step 4.

The problem is solved.

From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in
the tray?
Step 3
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?

Troubleshooting

318

Action

Yes

Step 4
a Reinstall the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.

Go to step 5.

The problem is solved.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

Yes

b Resend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Step 5
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?

Streaked vertical lines appear on prints
Leading edge

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Trailing edge

Action

Go to step 2.
Step 1
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture,
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.

The problem is solved.

Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper texture, type, and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper texture, type, and weight match the paper in the tray?

Go to step 3.

Do one or more of the
following:

• Specify the paper
texture, type, and
weight from the
tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.

• Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
texture, type, and
weight specified in
the tray settings.

Troubleshooting

319

Action

Yes

Step 3
a Load paper from a fresh package.

Go to step 4.

The problem is solved.

Go to step 5.

The problem is solved.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Step 4
a Reinstall the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
2 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.

b Resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Step 5
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?

The problem is solved.
Contact customer
support at
http://support.lexmar
k.com or your service
representative.

Toner fog or background shading appears on prints

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action

Yes

Step 1
Reinstall the imaging unit.
a Remove, and then install the imaging unit.

Go to step 2.

The problem is solved.

b Resend the print job.
Does fog or shading appear on prints?
Step 2
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Does fog or shading appear on prints?

Contact customer
The problem is solved.
support at
http://support.lexmar
k.com or your service
representative.

Troubleshooting

320

Toner rubs off
Leading edge

ABC
DEF
Trailing edge

Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

Specify the paper type
and weight from the
tray settings to match
the paper loaded in the
tray.

From the Paper menu
on the printer control
panel, set the paper
texture.

Contact customer
support.

Action

Yes

Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

Set the paper type to
Transparency.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the paper type
and weight.
Do the paper type and weight match the paper loaded in the tray?
Step 2
Check if you are printing on paper that is heavy or has texture or rough
finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?

Toner specks appear on prints

Do toner specks appear on prints?

Transparency print quality is poor

From the printer control panel, set the paper type in the Paper menu to
match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the paper type for the tray set to Transparency?
Step 2
a Check if you are using a recommended type of transparency.

b Resend the print job.
Is the print quality still poor?

Troubleshooting

321

Uneven print density

Action

Yes

Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

Action

Yes

Step 1
a Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.

Go to step 2.

The problem is solved.

Go to step 3.
Step 2
a From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the
Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.

The problem is solved.

Is the print density uneven?

Vertical voids appear on prints
Leading edge

Trailing edge

b Resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?

Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Step 3
Go to step 4.
Check if you are using a recommended type of paper.
a Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper.

b Resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?

The problem is solved.

Troubleshooting

322

Action

Yes

Step 4
a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.

Go to step 5.

The problem is solved.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

Action

Yes

Step 1

Clear the error or status Go to step 2.
message.

b Resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Step 5
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?

Solving copy problems
•
•
•
•

“Copier does not respond” on page 322
“Partial document or photo copies” on page 323
“Poor copy quality” on page 323
“Scanner unit does not close” on page 325

Copier does not respond

Check if an error or status message appears on the display.
Does an error or status message appear?
Step 2
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.

Go to step 3.

Connect the power
cord to the printer and
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.

Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn it back
on.
Step 3

Did Performing Self Test and Ready appear?

Troubleshooting

323

Partial document or photo copies
Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

Place the document or
photo facedown on the
scanner glass in the
upper left corner.

Go to step 3.

Change the paper size
setting to match the
paper loaded in the
tray, or load the tray
with paper that
matches the paper size
setting.

Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner
glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Step 2
Check if the paper size setting matches the size of the paper loaded in the
tray.
From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the Paper
Size setting.
Does the paper size setting match the size of the paper loaded in the tray.

The problem is solved. Contact customer
Step 3
support.
a Specify the paper size. Depending on your operating system, specify
the paper size in Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Do copies print properly?

Poor copy quality
Action

Yes

Step 1

Clear the error or status Go to step 2.
message.

Check if an error or status message appears on the display.

Does an error or status message appear?
Step 2

Go to step 3.

Increase the scan
resolution setting for a
higher‑quality output.

Go to step 4.

See “Cleaning the
scanner glass” on
page 240.

Check the quality of the original document.
Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?
Step 3
If dark marks appear on prints, then clean the scanner glass and the ADF
glass using a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water.
Is the scanner glass clean?

Troubleshooting

324

Action

Yes

Step 4

Go to step 5.

See “Print quality
problems” on
page 303.

Go to step 6.

Place the document or
photo facedown on the
scanner glass in the
upper left corner.

Go to step 7.

Change the Content
Type and Content
Source settings to
match the document
being scanned.

Go to step 8.

The problem is solved.

Go to step 9.

The problem is solved.

Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.
a From the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco‑Mode settings.

b From the Copy menu, adjust the Darkness setting.
c If the print remains faded, then replace the toner cartridge.
Is the print quality satisfactory?
Step 5
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner
glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Step 6
Check the copy settings.
From the Copy screen, check if the Content Type and Content Source
settings are correct for the document being scanned.
Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the
document being scanned?
Step 7
Check for patterns on prints.
a From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Sharpness > select a lower
setting
Note: Make sure no scaling is being selected.
b Resend the copy job.
Do patterns appear on prints?
Step 8
Check for missing or faded text on prints.
a From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging

b Adjust the settings:
• Sharpness—Increase the current setting.
• Contrast—Increase the current setting.
c Resend the copy job.
Do prints have missing or faded text?

Troubleshooting

325

Action

Yes

Step 9

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

Action

Yes

Check if there are no obstructions between the scanner unit and the
printer.
a Lift the scanner unit.

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Check for washed‑out or overexposed output.
a From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging
b Adjust the settings of the following:

• Background Removal—Reduce the current setting.
• Shadow Detail—Reduce the current setting.
c Resend the copy job.
Do pages show washed‑out or overexposed prints?

Scanner unit does not close

b Remove any obstruction that keeps the scanner unit open.
c Lower the scanner unit.
Did the scanner unit close properly?

Solving fax problems
•
•
•
•
•
•

“Caller ID is not shown” on page 326
“Cannot send or receive a fax” on page 326
“Can receive but not send faxes” on page 328
“Can send but not receive faxes” on page 329
“Fax and e-mail functions are not set up” on page 330
“Received fax has poor print quality” on page 330

Troubleshooting

326

Caller ID is not shown
Action

Yes

Contact your telephone company to check if your telephone line is
subscribed to the caller ID service.

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Notes:

• If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, then you may
have to change the default setting. There are two settings
available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2).

• The availability of these settings in the Fax menu depends on
whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID
patterns.

• Contact your telephone company to determine which pattern or
switch setting to use.
Does the caller ID appear?

Cannot send or receive a fax
Action

Yes

Step 1

Clear the error or status Go to step 2.
message.

Check if an error or status message appears on the display.

Is there an error or status message on the display?
Step 2

Go to step 3.

Connect the power
cord to the printer and
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.

Go to step 4.

Turn on the printer,
and then wait until
Ready appears on the
display.

Go to step 5.

Securely connect the
cables.

Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Step 3
Check the power.
Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready appears
on the display.
Is the printer turned on, and does Ready appear on the display?
Step 4
Check the printer connections.
If applicable, check if the cable connections for the following
equipment are secure:

• Telephone
• Handset
• Answering machine
Are the cable connections secure?

Troubleshooting

327

Action

Yes

Step 5
a Check the telephone wall jack.
1 Plug the telephone cable into the wall jack.

The problem is solved. Go to step 6.

2 Listen for a dial tone.
3 If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a different telephone cable
into the wall jack.

4 If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug the telephone cable
into a different wall jack.

5 If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.
b Try sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
Step 6

Go to step 7.

Connect the printer to
an analog phone
service or the correct
digital connector.

Go to step 8.

• Try calling the fax

Check if the printer is connected to an analog phone service or the correct
digital connector.
The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be connected
to the printer so that digital telephone services can be used.

• If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect the
printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface port) on an
ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to request an Rinterface port, contact your ISDN provider.

• If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router that will
support analog use. For more information, contact your DSL
provider.

• If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure you are
connecting to an analog connection on the PBX. If none exists, then
consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine.
Is the printer connected to an analog phone service or the correct digital
connector?
Step 7
Check for a dial tone.
Did you hear a dial tone?

number to make
sure that it is
working properly.

• If the telephone
line is being used by
another device,
then wait until the
other device is
finished before
sending a fax.

• If you are using the
On Hook Dial
feature, then turn
up the volume to
check if you hear a
dial tone.

Troubleshooting

328

Action

Yes

Step 8

The problem is solved. Go to step 9.

Temporarily disconnect other equipment (such as answering machines,
computers with modems, or telephone line splitters) between the printer
and the telephone line, and then try sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is solved. Go to step 10.
Step 9
a Temporarily disable call waiting. Contact your telephone company to
obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling call waiting.
b Try sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is solved. Go to step 11.
Step 10
a Temporarily disable voice mail service. For more information, contact
your telephone company.
Note: If you want to use both voice mail and the printer, then
consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.
b Try sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
Step 11
Scan the original document one page at a time.
a Dial the fax number.

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

b Scan the document one page at a time.
Can you send or receive a fax?

Can receive but not send faxes
Action

Yes

Step 1

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Check if the printer is in Fax mode.
From the home screen, touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode, and
then send the fax.
Note: The Multi Send application does not support the XPS output type.
To use XPS, use the regular faxing method.
Can you send faxes?

Troubleshooting

329

Action

Yes

Step 2

The problem is solved. Go to step 3.

Load the original document properly.
Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray
or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray.
Place these items on the scanner glass.
Can you send faxes?
Step 3
Set up the shortcut number properly.

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

• Check if the shortcut number has been set for the telephone number
that you want to dial.

• Dial the telephone number manually.
Can you send faxes?

Can send but not receive faxes
Action

Yes

Step 1

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Check the tray or feeder.
If empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder.
Can you receive faxes?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.

Step 2
Check the ring count delay settings.
a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the
address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP
address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods,
such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to
load the Web page correctly.

b Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
c In the “Rings to Answer” field, enter the number of times you want
the phone to ring before the printer answers.
d Click Submit.
Can you receive faxes?

Troubleshooting

330

Action

Yes

Step 3

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Replace the toner cartridge. For more information, see the instruction
sheet that came with the supply.

Can you receive faxes?

Fax and e-mail functions are not set up
Notes:

• Before you troubleshoot, check if the fax cables are connected.
• The indicator light is blinking red until you set up fax and e‑mail.
Action

Yes

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

a From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Run initial setup > Yes >
Submit
b Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
The “Select your language” screen appears on the printer display.

c
d
e
f

Select a language, and then touch

Select a country or region, and then touch Next.
Select a time zone, and then touch Next.
Select Fax and E‑mail, and then touch Next.

Are fax and e‑mail functions set up?

Received fax has poor print quality
Action

Yes

Step 1

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Ask the person who sent you the fax to:
a Check if the quality of the original document is satisfactory.

b Increase the fax scan resolution, if possible.
c Resend the fax.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?

Troubleshooting

331

Action

Yes

Step 2

The problem is solved. Go to step 3.

Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed.
a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the
address field.
Notes:

• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP
address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods,
such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to
load the Web page correctly.

• Print a network setup page or menu settings page, and then
locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.

b Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
c In the Max Speed menu, click one of the following:
• 2400
• 4800
• 9600
• 14400
• 33600
d Click Submit, and then resend the fax.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?
Step 3
Replace the toner cartridge.
When Cartridge low [88.xy] appears, replace the cartridge,
and then resend the fax.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?

Solving scanner problems
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

“Cannot scan from a computer” on page 332
“Partial document or photo scans” on page 332
“Poor scanned image quality” on page 332
“Scan job was not successful” on page 333
“Scanner unit does not close” on page 334
“Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer” on page 334
“The scanner does not respond” on page 335

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Troubleshooting

332

Cannot scan from a computer
Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 3.

Go to step 2.

Clear the error
message.

Go to step 3.

Make sure the printer is turned on and that Ready appears on the printer
display before scanning a job.
Does Ready appear before scanning the job?
Step 2
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
Is there an error message on the printer display?
Contact customer
Check the cable connections between the printer and the print server to support.
make sure they are secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with
the printer.
Step 3

Tighten the cable
connections.

Are the cable connections between the printer and the print server
secure?

Partial document or photo scans
Action

Yes

Check the placement of the document or photo.
Contact customer
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner support.
glass in the upper left corner.

No
Load the document or
photo facedown on the
scanner glass in the
upper left corner.

Is the document or photo loaded correctly?

Poor scanned image quality
Action

Yes

Step 1

Clear the error
message.

Go to step 2.

Go to step 3.

Increase the scan
resolution settings for a
higher‑quality output.

Check if an error message appears on the display.
Is there an error message on the printer display?
Step 2
Check the quality of the original document.
Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?

Troubleshooting

333

Action

Yes

Step 3

Go to step 4.

See “Cleaning the
scanner glass” on
page 240.

Go to step 5.

Place the document or
photo facedown on the
scanner glass in the
upper left corner.

Go to step 6.

See “Print quality
problems” on
page 303.

Go to step 7.

Change the Content
Type and Content
Source settings to
match the document
being scanned.

Problem solved.

Contact customer
support.

Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

Connect the cables
properly.

Change the file name.

Go to step 3.

Clean the scanner glass and the ADF glass using a clean, lint‑free cloth
dampened with water.
Is the scanner glass clean?
Step 4
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner
glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Step 5
Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.

• From the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco‑Mode settings.
• From the Copy menu, adjust the Darkness setting.
• When the print becomes faded, replace the toner cartridge.
Is the print quality satisfactory?
Step 6
Check the scan settings.
From the Scan screen, make sure the Content Type and Content Source
settings are correct for the document being scanned.
Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the
document being scanned?
Step 7
Increase the scan resolution settings for a higher‑quality output.
Did the increased resolution produce a higher‑quality output?

Scan job was not successful

Check the cable connections.
Make sure the Ethernet or USB cable is securely connected to the
computer and the printer.
Are the cables securely connected?
Step 2
Check if the file name is already in use.
Is the file name already in use?

Troubleshooting

334

Action

Yes

Step 3

Close the file you are
scanning.

Go to step 4.

Check if the document or photo you want to scan is open in another
application or being used by another user.
Is the file you want to scan open by another application or user?

Contact customer
Check if either the Append time stamp or the Overwrite existing file check support.
box is selected in the destination configuration settings.
Step 4

Is the Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file check box selected
in the destination configuration settings?

Select the Append time
stamp or Overwrite
existing file check box
in the destination
configuration settings.

Scanner unit does not close
Action

Yes

Check if there are obstructions in the scanner unit.
a Lift the scanner unit.

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

b Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.
c Lower the scanner unit.
Did the scanner unit close correctly?

Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer
Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

The problem is solved.

Contact customer
support.

The problem is solved.

Check if other applications are interfering with the scan.
Close all applications that are not being used.
Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?
Step 2
Select a lower scan resolution.
Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?

Troubleshooting

335

The scanner does not respond
Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

Turn on the printer.

Go to step 3.

Connect the printer
cable securely to the
printer and the
computer, print server,
option, or other
network device.

Go to step 4.

Connect the power
cord to the printer and
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.

Turn on the switch or
reset the breaker.

Go to step 5.

Check if the printer is turned on.
Is the printer turned on?
Step 2
Check if the printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the
computer, print server, option, or other network device.
Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer,
print server, option, or other network device?
Step 3
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Step 4
Check if the electrical outlet is turned off by a switch or breaker.
Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker?
Step 5

Connect the printer
Go to step 6.
power
cord
directly
to
Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible
a properly grounded
power supplies, or extension cords.
electrical outlet.
Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power
supplies, or extension cords?
Step 6
Check other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet.
Are the other electrical equipment working?

Step 7
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
Are the printer and scanner working?

Unplug the other
Go to step 7.
electrical equipment
and turn on the printer.
If the printer does not
work, then reconnect
the other electrical
equipment and then go
to step 6.
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Troubleshooting

336

Solving home screen applications problems
An application error has occurred
Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

Contact customer
support.

Check the system log for relevant details.
a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the
address field.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:

• View the IP address on the printer home screen.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages, and then
locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by
periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
b Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > System tab > Log.

c From the Filter menu, select an application status.
d From the Application menu, select an application, and then click
Submit.
Does an error message appear in the log?
Step 2
Resolve the error.

The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.

Is the application working now?

Embedded Web Server does not open
Action

Yes

Step 1

Go to step 2.

Type the correct
printer IP address in the
address field of your
Web browser.

Make sure the printer IP address is correct.
View the printer IP address:

• From the printer home screen
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then

Note: Depending on
the network settings,
you may need to type
“https://” instead of
“http://” before the
printer IP address to
access the Embedded
Web Server.

finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by
periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Is the printer IP address correct?
Step 2
Check if the printer is turned on.
Is the printer turned on?

Go to step 3.

Turn on the printer.

Troubleshooting

337

Action

Yes

Step 3

Go to step 4.

Contact your system
support person.

Go to step 5.

Tighten the cable
connection.

Go to step 6.

Contact your system
support person.

Check if the network connection is working.
Is the network connection working?
Step 4
Make sure the cable connections to the printer and print server are secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with
the printer.
Are the cable connections to the printer and print server secure?
Step 5
Temporarily disable the Web proxy servers.
Note: Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain
Web sites including the Embedded Web Server.
Are the Web proxy servers disabled?

Step 6
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Access the Embedded Web Server again by typing the correct IP address
in the address field.
Did the Embedded Web Server open?

Contacting customer support
When you contact customer support, describe the problem you are experiencing, the printer control panel light
sequence, and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.
You need to know your printer model type and serial number. For more information, see the label on the inside top
front cover of the printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.
Lexmark has various ways to help you solve your printing problem. Visit the Lexmark Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com, and then select one of the following:
Tech Library You can browse our library of manuals, support documentation, drivers, and other downloads to help you
solve common problems.
E-mail

You can send an e-mail to the Lexmark team, describing your problem. A service representative will respond
and provide you with information to solve your problem.

Live chat

You can chat directly with a service representative. They can work with you to solve your printer problem or
provide assistance through Assisted Service where the service representative can remotely connect to your
computer through the Internet to troubleshoot problems, install updates, or complete other tasks to help
you successfully use your Lexmark product.

Telephone support is also available. In the U.S. or Canada, call 1-800-539-6275. For other countries or regions, visit the
Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.

Notices

338

Notices
Product information
Product name:
Lexmark XM5163 and XM5170
Machine type:
7463
Model(s):
096, 296

Edition notice
September 2012
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain
transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or
the programs described may be made at any time.
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make
these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to
state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program,
or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification
of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the
manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.
For Lexmark technical support, visit http://support.lexmark.com.
For information on supplies and downloads, visit www.lexmark.com.
© 2012 Lexmark International, Inc.
All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT END USERS
The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R.
2.101, "Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R.
12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7207-4,
as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software Documentation are licensed to the U.S.
Government end users (a) only as Commerical Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users
pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.

Notices

339

Trademarks
Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, MarkNet, and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc.,
registered in the United States and/or other countries.
ScanBack is a trademark of Lexmark International, Inc.
Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s designation of a
set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be
compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application
programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.
The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies:
Albertus

The Monotype Corporation plc

Antique Olive

Monsieur Marcel OLIVE

Apple-Chancery

Apple Computer, Inc.

Arial

The Monotype Corporation plc

CG Times

Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc, is a product of
Agfa Corporation

Chicago

Apple Computer, Inc.

Clarendon

Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries

Eurostile

Nebiolo

Geneva

Apple Computer, Inc.

GillSans

The Monotype Corporation plc

Helvetica

Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries

Hoefler

Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry

ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation
ITC Bookman

International Typeface Corporation

ITC Mona Lisa

International Typeface Corporation

ITC Zapf Chancery

International Typeface Corporation

Joanna

The Monotype Corporation plc

Marigold

Arthur Baker

Monaco

Apple Computer, Inc.

New York

Apple Computer, Inc.

Oxford

Arthur Baker

Palatino

Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries

Stempel Garamond

Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries

Taffy

Agfa Corporation

Times New Roman

The Monotype Corporation plc

Notices

Univers

340

Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment
is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case
the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended
cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could
void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing device,
use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for
USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC
regulations.

Modular component notice
This product may contain the following modular component(s):
Lexmark Regulatory Type/Model LEX-M01-005; FCC ID:IYLLEXM01005; IC:2376A-M01005

Licensing notices
All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the root directory of the documentation CD.

Noise emission levels
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
1-meter average sound pressure, dBA
Printing

58 dBA

Scanning

57 dBA

Copying

58 dBA

Ready

33 dBA

Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.

Notices

341

Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive

The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European
Union. We encourage the recycling of our products.
If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com for your local
sales office phone number.

Product disposal
Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local authorities
for disposal and recycling options.

Static sensitivity notice

This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the
metal frame of the printer.

ENERGY STAR
Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certified to comply
with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark.

Notices

342

Temperature information
Ambient operating temperature

15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)

Shipping and storage temperature

1 to 35°C (34 to 95°F)

Laser notice
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Chapter I, Subchapter J for Class I
(1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser that is
nominally a 10 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 787-800 nanometers. The laser system
and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal
operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.

Laser advisory label
A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown:
DANGER - Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated. Avoid exposure to laser beam.
PERIGO - Radiação a laser invisível será liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido. Evite a exposição aos feixes de laser.
Opasnost - Nevidljivo lasersko zračenje kada su kasete uklonjene i poništena sigurnosna veza. Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima.
NEBEZPEČÍ - Když jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokována pojistka, ze zařízení je vysíláno neviditelné laserové záření. Nevystavujte se působení laserového paprsku.
FARE - Usynlig laserstråling, når patroner fjernes, og spærreanordningen er slået fra. Undgå at blive udsat for laserstrålen.
GEVAAR - Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd. Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser.
DANGER - Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du déverrouillage des loquets. Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser.
VAARA - Näkymätöntä lasersäteilyä on varottava, kun värikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki. Vältä lasersäteelle altistumista.
GEFAHR - Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre. Laserstrahl meiden.
ΚΙΝΔΥΝΟΣ - Έκλυση αόρατης ακτινοβολίας laser κατά την αφαίρεση των κασετών και την απασφάλιση της μανδάλωσης. Αποφεύγετε την έκθεση στην ακτινοβολία laser.
VESZÉLY – Nem látható lézersugárzás fordulhat elő a patronok eltávolításakor és a zárószerkezet felbontásakor. Kerülje a lézersugárnak való kitettséget.
PERICOLO - Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco. Evitare l´esposizione al raggio laser.
FARE – Usynlig laserstråling når kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill. Unngå eksponering for laserstrålen.
NIEBEZPIECZEŃSTWO - niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady. Należy unikać naświetlenia promieniem lasera.
ОПАСНО! Невидимое лазерное излучение при извлеченных картриджах и снятии блокировки. Избегайте воздействия лазерных лучей.
Pozor – Nebezpečenstvo neviditeľného laserového žiarenia pri odobratých kazetách a odblokovanej poistke. Nevystavujte sa lúčom.
PELIGRO: Se producen radiaciones láser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado. Evite la exposición al haz de láser.
FARA – Osynlig laserstrålning när patroner tas ur och spärrmekanismen är upphävd. Undvik exponering för laserstrålen.
危险 - 当移除碳粉盒及互锁失效时会产生看不见的激光辐射，请避免暴露在激光光束下。
危險 - 移除碳粉匣與安全連續開關失效時會產生看不見的雷射輻射。請避免曝露在雷射光束下。
危険 - カートリッジが取り外され、内部ロックが無効になると、見えないレーザー光が放射されます。 このレーザー光に当たらないようにしてください。

Power consumption
Product power consumption
The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.

Notices

343

Mode

Description

Power consumption (Watts)

Printing

The product is generating hard‑copy output from electronic inputs.

825 (XM5163); 925 (XM5170)

Copy

The product is generating hard‑copy output from hard‑copy original
documents.

860 (XM5163); 960 (XM5170)

Scan

The product is scanning hard‑copy documents.

130

Ready

The product is waiting for a print job.

110 (Ready 1); 55 (Ready 2)

Sleep Mode The product is in a high‑level energy‑saving mode.

14 (XM5163); 15 (XM5170)

Hibernate

The product is in a low‑level energy‑saving mode.

0.7

Off

The product is plugged into an electrical outlet, but the power switch is turned 0
off.

The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements. Instantaneous
power draws may be substantially higher than the average.
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.

Sleep Mode
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering
power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product
is not used for a specified period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.
Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes):

By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 180 minutes. Setting
the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response time of the product.
Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.

Hibernate Mode
This product is designed with an ultra‑low power operating mode called Hibernate mode. When operating in Hibernate
Mode, all other systems and devices are powered down safely.
The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods:

• Using the Hibernate Timeout
• Using the Schedule Power modes
• Using the Sleep/Hibernate button
Factory default Hibernate Timeout for this product in all countries or regions

Disabled

The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode can be modified between
one hour and one month.

Off mode
If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product power
consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet.

Notices

344

Total energy usage
It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are provided in
power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in
order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.

Industry Canada compliance statement
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard
ICES-003.

Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada
Cet appareil numérique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux équipements
pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.

European Community (EC) directives conformity
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and
1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility and safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment
and telecommunications terminal equipment.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.

Radio interference notice
Warning
This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN55022 Class A limits and immunity requirements
of EN55024. This product is not intended to be used in residential/domestic environments.
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user
may be required to take adequate measures.

Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment
This section contains regulatory information pertaining to products that contain telecommunication terminal
equipment such as facsimile.

Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council
for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a

Notices

345

product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to your telephone
company.
This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises’ wiring and telephone network must comply with the
applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is
provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See your
setup documentation for more information.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone
line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most
but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be
connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone company. For products approved
after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.
The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products,
the REN is shown separately on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will
notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the
operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to
make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc.
at www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the
telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark International,
Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service
commission, or corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this
equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment,
consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical
surges.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic
device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or
bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification
of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending
machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or
any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)
See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.

Notices

346

Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is
an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The terminus of
an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of
all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter’s
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical
surges.
This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.

Avis réservé aux utilisateurs du réseau téléphonique du Canada
Ce produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada. Le numéro REN (ringer equivalence number :
numéro d’équivalence de sonnerie) fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant être connectés
à l’interface téléphonique. En bout de ligne, le nombre d’appareils qui peuvent être connectés n’est pas directement
limité, mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas dépasser cinq. Le numéro REN du modem est indiqué sur
l’étiquette produit située à l’arrière de l’équipement.
Les compagnies de téléphone constatent que les surtensions électriques, en particulier celles dues à la foudre,
entraînent d'importants dégâts sur les terminaux privés connectés à des sources d’alimentation CA. Il s’agit-là d’un
problème majeur d’échelle nationale. En conséquence, il vous est recommandé de brancher un parasurtenseur dans
la prise de courant à laquelle l’équipement est connecté. Utilisez un parasurtenseur répondant à des caractéristiques
nominales satisfaisantes et certifié par le laboratoire d’assureurs UL (Underwriter’s Laboratories), un autre laboratoire
agréé de type NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory) ou un organisme de certification agréé dans votre région
ou pays. Ceci prévient tout endommagement de l’équipement causé par les orages et autres surtensions électriques.
Cet équipement utilise des prises de téléphone CA11A.

Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network
The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal
equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection
to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above
all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted
equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network
services.
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.
This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line.
This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom
customers.

Notices

347

Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment
associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance
to Telecom's specifications:

• There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual
call initiation, and

• The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the
beginning of the next call attempt.

• The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not
less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.

Using this product in Switzerland
This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 14B5109 or 80D1877) to be installed on any line
which receives metering pulses in Switzerland. The Lexmark filter must be used, as metering pulses are present on all
analog telephone lines in Switzerland.

Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse
Cet appareil nécessite l’utilisation d’un filtre de tonalité de facturation suisse (nº de référence Lexmark : 14B5109 ou
80D1877) devant être installé sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse. Ce filtre doit être utilisé
pour toute installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes téléphoniques suisses.

Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz
Für dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zählzeichenübertragung (Lexmark Teilenummer
14B5109 oder 80D1877) für jede Leitung installiert werden, über die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte übertragen werden.
Die Verwendung des Lexmark Filters ist obligatorisch, da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz
Zeitsteuertakte vorhanden sind.

Uso del prodotto in Svizzera
Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero, (codice Lexmark 14B5109 o 80D1877) da installare su tutte le
linee che ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera. È necessario utilizzare il filtro Lexmark poiché gli impulsi remoti sono
presenti su tutte le linee analogiche in Svizzera.

Notice to Users in the European Union
Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC,
2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio
equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.

Notices

348

Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

Regulatory notices for wireless products
This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters,
for example, but not limited to, wireless network cards or proximity card readers.

Exposure to radio frequency radiation
The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory
agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for
this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.

Industry Canada (Canada)
This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided. Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited
per regulations of Industry Canada.
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from
windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to
licensing.
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF
fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health
Canada's Web site www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.

Industry Canada (Canada)
Cet appareil est conforme à la norme RSS-210 d'Industry Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions
suivantes :

Notices

349

(1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris celles
risquant d'altérer son fonctionnement.
Cet appareil a été conçu pour fonctionner uniquement avec l'antenne fournie. L'utilisation de toute autre antenne est
strictement interdite par la réglementation d'Industry Canada.
En application des réglementations d'Industry Canada, l'utilisation d'une antenne de gain supérieur est strictement
interdite.
Pour empêcher toute interférence radio au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, cet appareil doit être utilisé à l'intérieur
et loin des fenêtres afin de garantir une protection optimale.
Si le matériel (ou son antenne d'émission) est installé à l'extérieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence.
L'installateur de cet équipement radio doit veiller à ce que l'antenne soit implantée et dirigée de manière à n'émettre
aucun champ HF dépassant les limites fixées pour l'ensemble de la population par Santé Canada. Reportez-vous au
Code de sécurité 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Santé Canada www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
Le terme « IC » précédant le numéro de d'accréditation/inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme
aux spécifications techniques d'Industry Canada.

Notice to users in the European Union
Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC,
2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, and on
radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.
Products equipped with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council
directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the
Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain
voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries, but is restricted to indoor use only.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium

Notices

350

Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below.
AT

Česky

Společnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se základními
požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.

Dansk

Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved, at dette produkt overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante
krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.

Deutsch

Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit den
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG
befindet.

Ελληνική

ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ
ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ
ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.

English

Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

Español

Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos
esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.

Eesti

Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ
põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.

Suomi

Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten
ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.

Français

Par la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences
fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.

Magyar

Alulírott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ
követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.

Íslenska

Hér með lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar
kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.

Italiano

Con la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti
essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.

Latviski

Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām
prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.

Lietuvių

Šiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas
1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas.

Malti

Bil-preżenti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet
essenzjali u ma dispożizzjonijiet oħrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.

Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essentiële
eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.

Notices

351

Norsk

Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og
øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.

Polski

Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi
wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.

Português

A Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras
disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.

Slovensky Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky
príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES.
Slovensko Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi
relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Svenska

Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga
egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.

STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS,
LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER PRINTERS
Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY
This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the countryspecific warranty information that came with your product.
This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale, from
Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”

Limited warranty
Lexmark warrants that this product:
—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship
If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair
or replacement (at Lexmark's option).
If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product
for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or option with the
product.
If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user
for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that
user.

Limited warranty service
The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later
provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end
earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed. Fuser Units, Transfer/Transport
Units, Paper Feed items, if any, and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is available are substantially consumed
when the printer displays a “Life Warning” or “Scheduled Maintenance” message for such item.

Notices

352

To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to deliver
your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location.
You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location.
When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of the
Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.
The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.
Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a repair not
included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal obligations, restrictions,
liens, and encumbrances.
As part of your warranty service and/or replacement, Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the latest
version. Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and/or unauthorized products, supplies,
parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces to stop working. Authorized use of genuine Lexmark
products will not be impacted.
Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable storage
media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).
For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact
Lexmark on the World Wide Web.
Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer covered
by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.

Extent of limited warranty
Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints
produced by any product.
Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:
—Modification or unauthorized attachments
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment
—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR
REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH
RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT
MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES,
AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.

Notices

353

Limitation of liability
Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance or
nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover actual
damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.
Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product
that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real
property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR
ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any
claim by you based on a third party claim.
This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's and its
Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended
beneficiaries of this limitation.

Additional rights
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or limitation
of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you.
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.

Patent acknowledgment
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Elliptic Curve Cryptography (ECC) Cipher Suites for Transport
Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Elliptic Curve Cipher Suites with SHA-256/382 and AES Galois
Counter Mode (GCM) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Suite B Profile for Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented
in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Addition of the Camellia Cipher Suites to Transport Layer Security
(TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of certain patents in this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the
Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for AES-CCM ECC Cipher Suites for TLS
implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for IKE and IKEv2 Authentication Using the Eliptic Curve Digital
Signature Algorithm (ECDSA) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Suite B Cryptographic Suites for IPSec implemented in the
product or service.

Notices

354

The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Algorithms for Internet Key Exchange version 1 (IKEv1)
implemented in the product or service.

Index

355

Index
Numerics
2100‑sheet tray
installing 50
loading paper 72
250‑sheet tray
installing 50
loading 66
550‑sheet tray
installing 50
loading 66

Symbols
[x]‑ page jam, open upper rear
door. [202] 262
[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder.
[250] 268
[x]‑page jam, lift front cover to
remove cartridge. [200–201] 259
[x]‑page jam, open automatic
feeder top cover. [28y.xx] 270
[x]‑page jam, open tray [x].
[24x] 267
[x]‑page jam, open upper and lower
rear door. [231–234] 263
[x]‑page jam, remove standard bin
jam. [203] 265
[x]‑page jam, remove tray 1 to clear
duplex. [235–239] 266

A
accessing the Embedded Web
Server 22
Active NIC menu 165
adapter plug 130
ADF
copying using 101
adjusting brightness
Embedded Web Server 232
printer display 232
adjusting copy quality 106
adjusting display brightness 232
adjusting Sleep mode 231
adjusting toner darkness 93
administrator settings
Embedded Web Server 253
advanced options
copy options 112

e‑mail options 119
fax options 143
FTP options 151
answering machine
setting up 122
AppleTalk menu 170
applications
understanding 23
attaching cables 53
available internal options 29
avoiding jams 90
avoiding paper jams 256

B
blocking junk faxes 140
buttons, printer control panel 16
buttons, touch screen
using 19

C
cables
Ethernet 53
USB 53
canceling
print job, from computer 99
canceling a print job
from a computer 99
from the printer control panel 99
canceling an e-mail 117
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 336
Card Copy
setting up 24
card stock
loading 78
tips 85
Cartridge low [88.xy] 272
Cartridge nearly low [88.xy] 272
Cartridge very low, [x] estimated
pages remain [88.xy] 272
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] load [orientation] 272
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] load [orientation] 272
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] load [orientation] 272

Change [paper source] to [paper
type] [paper size] load
[orientation] 273
Check tray [x] connection 273
checking an unresponsive
printer 289
checking status of parts and
supplies 242
checking the status of parts and
supplies 242
checking the virtual display
using the Embedded Web
Server 253
checking virtual display
using the Embedded Web
Server 253
cleaning
exterior of the printer 239
scanner glass 240
cleaning the printer 239
Close door or insert cartridge 273
Close flatbed cover and load
originals if restarting job
[2yy.xx] 273
Close front door 274
Close top access cover 274
collate
copy options 111
collating copies 107
Complex page, some data may not
have printed [39] 274
compressed images appear on
prints 305
confidential data
information on securing 238
confidential jobs
modifying print settings 98
confidential print jobs 97
printing from a Macintosh
computer 98
printing from Windows 98
Confidential Print menu 180
Configuration change, some held
jobs were not restored [57] 274
configuration information
wireless network 59
Configure MP menu 153

Index

configuring
supply notifications, imaging
unit 254
supply notifications, maintenance
kit 254
supply notifications, toner
cartridge 254
configuring e‑mail settings 113
configuring port settings 62
configuring supply notifications 254
connecting printer to distinctive
ring service 134
connecting to a wireless network
using PIN (Personal Identification
Number) method 61
using Push Button Configuration
method 61
using the Embedded Web
Server 61
using wireless setup wizard 60
conservation settings
brightness, adjusting 232
conserving supplies 229
Eco‑Mode 230
Hibernate mode 232
Quiet Mode 230
Sleep mode 231
conserving supplies 229
contacting customer support 337
content
e‑mail settings 118
content source
e‑mail settings 118
fax options 141
content type
e‑mail settings 118
fax options 141
control panel, printer 16
indicator light 16
Sleep button light 16
controller board
accessing 30
copies
copy options 111
copy job, canceling
using the ADF 110
using the scanner glass 110
copy options
advanced options 112
collate 111
copies 111
darkness 111

356

Save As Shortcut 112
sides (duplex) 111
copy quality
adjusting 106
copy screen
content source 111
content type 111
options 110, 111
Copy Settings menu 193
copy troubleshooting
copier does not respond 322
partial document or photo
copies 323
poor copy quality 323
poor scanned image quality 332
scanner unit does not
close 325, 334
copying
adding an overlay message 109
adjusting quality 106
canceling a copy job 110
collating copies 107
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 103
custom job 108
different paper sizes 104
enlarging 106
inserting a header or footer 109
multiple pages on one sheet 108
on both sides of the paper
(duplexing) 105
on letterhead 103
on transparencies 102
photos 102
placing separator sheets between
copies 107
quick copy 101
reducing 106
selecting a tray 104
to a different size 104
using the ADF 101
using the scanner glass 102
copying different paper sizes 104
copying multiple pages on one
sheet 108
copying on both sides of the paper
(duplexing) 105
copying on transparencies 102
creating a fax destination shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 138

creating an FTP shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 144
Custom Names menu 162
custom paper type
assigning 83
custom paper type name
creating 83
Custom Scan Sizes menu 163
Custom Type [x]
changing name 83
Custom Types menu 162
customer support
contacting 337

D
darkness
copy options 111
e‑mail options 118
fax options 142
scan options 150
date and time, fax
setting 135
daylight saving time, setting 135
Default Source menu 153
Defective flash detected [51] 274
delayed send
fax options 143
device and network settings
information
erasing 236
different paper sizes, copying 104
Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)
fax setup 126
digital telephone service
fax setup 128
directory list
printing 99
Disk full 62 274
Disk full, scan job canceled 274
Disk must be formatted for use in
this device 275
disk wiping 236
Disk Wiping menu 181
display troubleshooting
printer display is blank 291
display, printer control panel 16
adjusting brightness 232
disposing of printer hard disk 235
distinctive ring service, fax
connecting to 134

Index

documents, printing
from Macintosh 93
from Windows 93
DSL filter 126
duplexing 105

E
Eco‑Mode setting 230
Edit Security Setups menu 178
embedded solutions information
erasing 236
Embedded Web Server
accessing 22
administrator settings 253
checking the status of parts 242
checking the status of
supplies 242
creating a fax destination
shortcut 138
creating an FTP shortcut 144
creating e‑mail shortcuts 114
initial fax setup 121
modifying confidential print
settings 98
networking settings 253
problem accessing 336
scanning to a computer using 147
setting up e‑mail alerts 253
Embedded Web Server
Administrator's Guide
where to find 238, 253
emission notices 340, 344, 348, 349
encrypting the printer hard
disk 237
enlarging a copy 106
envelopes
loading 78
tips on using 85
environmental settings
conserving supplies 229
display brightness, adjusting 232
Eco‑Mode 230
Hibernate mode 232
Quiet Mode 230
Sleep mode 231
erasing non‑volatile memory 236
erasing printer hard disk
memory 236
erasing volatile memory 235
Error reading USB drive. Remove
USB. 275

357

Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 275
Ethernet network
preparing to set up for Ethernet
printing 57
Ethernet network setup
using Macintosh 58
using Windows 58
Ethernet networking
Macintosh 58
Windows 58
Ethernet port 53
Ethernet setup
preparing for an 57
exporting a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 27
EXT port 53
exterior of the printer
cleaning 239
e‑mail
canceling 117
e‑mail alerts
low supply levels 253
paper jam 253
setting up 253
e‑mail function
setting up 113
e‑mail options
advanced options 119
darkness 118
message 117
original size 118
page setup 119
recipient(s) 117
resolution 118
Save As Shortcut 117
send as 118
subject 117
e‑mail screen
options 117, 119
E‑mail Settings menu 204
e‑mail shortcuts, creating
using the Embedded Web
Server 114
e‑mail, sending
using a shortcut number 115
using the address book 116
e‑mailing
adding message line 116
adding subject line 116
changing output file type 116

configuring e‑mail settings 113
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 114
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 114
setting up e‑mail function 113
using a shortcut number 115
using the address book 116
using the printer control
panel 115

F
factory defaults
restoring 255
fax
sending 136, 137
sending at a scheduled time 137
fax and e‑mail functions
setting up 330
fax and e‑mail functions are not set
up 330
fax log
viewing 139
Fax memory full 275
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)
menu 196
fax name, setting 134
fax number, setting 134
fax options
advanced options 143
content source 141
content type 141
darkness 142
delayed send 143
page setup 142
resolution 142
scan preview 143
Fax partition inoperative. Contact
system administrator. 275
fax port 53
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
Contact system administrator. 275
fax setup
country‑ or region‑specific 130
digital telephone service 128
DSL connection 126
standard telephone line
connection 122
VoIP 127
Fax Station Name not set up.
Contact system administrator. 276

Index

Fax Station Number not set up.
Contact system administrator. 276
fax troubleshooting
caller ID is not shown 326
can receive but not send
faxes 328
can send but not receive
faxes 329
cannot send or receive a fax 326
received fax has poor print
quality 330
faxing
blocking junk faxes 140
canceling a fax job 140
changing resolution 139
configuring the printer to observe
daylight saving time 135
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 138
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 138
distinctive ring service 134
fax setup 121
forwarding faxes 141
holding faxes 140
making a fax lighter or darker 139
sending a fax at a scheduled
time 137
sending using the printer control
panel 135
setting the date and time 135
setting the fax number 134
setting the outgoing fax name 134
viewing a fax log 139
FCC notices 340, 344, 348
file name
scan options 149
finding printer IP address 21
Finishing menu 218
firmware card 29
flash drive
printing from 95
Flash Drive menu 212
flash drives
supported file types 96
font sample list
printing 99
Forms and Favorites
setting up 23
forwarding faxes 141
FTP
FTP options 149

358

FTP address
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 145
FTP address, scanning to
using a shortcut number 146
using the printer control
panel 145
FTP options
advanced options 151
FTP 149
FTP Settings menu 208

G
General Settings menu 183
green settings
Eco‑Mode 230
Hibernate mode 232
Quiet Mode 230

H
held jobs 97
printing from a Macintosh
computer 98
printing from Windows 98
Help menu 228
Hibernate mode
using 232
hiding icons on the home screen 22
holding faxes 140
home screen
customizing 22
hiding icons 22
showing icons 22
home screen applications
configuring 23
finding information 23
home screen buttons and icons
description 17
HTML menu 226

I
icons on the home screen
hiding 22
showing 22
Image menu 227
imaging unit
ordering 243
Imaging unit low [84.xy] 276
Imaging unit nearly low [84.xy] 276
Imaging unit very low, [x] estimated
pages remain [84.xy] 276

importing a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 27
Incompatible tray [x] [59] 276
Incorrect paper size, open [paper
source] [34] 276
individual settings information
erasing 236
initial fax setup 121
using the Embedded Web
Server 121
Insert Tray [x] 277
inserting a header or footer 109
Install duplex 277
Install Tray [x] 277
installing an Internal Solutions
Port 37
installing an optional card 35
installing options
order of installation 50
installing printer hard disk 42
installing printer on a network
Ethernet networking 58
installing printer software
adding options 56
installing printer software
(Windows) 55
installing the 2100‑sheet tray 50
installing the 250‑sheet tray 50
installing the 550‑sheet tray 50
Insufficient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment operation
[37] 277
Insufficient memory to collate job
[37] 278
Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature [35] 278
Insufficient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted [37] 278
Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored [37] 278
internal options 29
internal print server
troubleshooting 292
Internal Solutions Port
changing port settings 62
installing 37
troubleshooting 292
IP address of computer
finding 21
IP address, printer
finding 21

Index

IPv6 menu 169

J
jams
accessing 257
avoiding 256
messages 257
jams, clearing
behind rear door 263
duplex 266
in automatic document feeder top
cover 270
in manual feeder 268
in tray [x] 267
inside the printer 259
rear door 262
standard bin jam 265
Job Accounting menu 220

L
labels, paper
tips 86
letterhead
copying on 103
loading, 2100‑sheet tray 72
loading, multipurpose
feeder 78, 86
loading, trays 66, 86
light, indicator 16
line filter 126
LINE port 53
linking trays 82, 83
Load [paper source] with [custom
string] [paper orientation] 278
Load [paper source] with [custom
type name] [paper orientation] 278
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] [paper orientation] 279
Load [paper source] with [paper
type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 279
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
string] [paper orientation] 279
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
type name] [paper orientation] 279
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
size] [paper orientation] 280
Load manual feeder with [paper
type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 280

359

loading
card stock 78
envelopes 78
letterhead in 2100‑sheet tray 72
letterhead in multipurpose
feeder 78
letterhead in trays 66
multipurpose feeder 78
transparencies 78
loading letterhead
paper orientation 86
loading paper
2100‑sheet tray 72
250‑sheet tray 66
550‑sheet tray 66

M
maintenance kit
ordering 244
Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 280
Maintenance kit nearly low
[80.xy] 280
Maintenance kit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 280
making copies using paper from
selected tray 104
memory
types installed on printer 235
memory card 29
installing 33
Memory full [38] 280
Memory full, cannot print
faxes 280
Memory full, cannot send
faxes 281
menu settings page
printing 65
menus
Active NIC 165
AppleTalk 170
Confidential Print 180
Configure MP 153
Copy Settings 193
Custom Names 162
Custom Scan Sizes 163
Custom Types 162
Default Source 153
diagram of 152
Disk Wiping 181
Edit Security Setups 178
E‑mail Settings 204

Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) 196
Finishing 218
Flash Drive 212
FTP Settings 208
General Settings 183
Help 228
HTML 226
Image 227
IPv6 169
Job Accounting 220
Miscellaneous Security
Settings 179
Network [x] 166
Network Card 167
Network Reports 167
Paper Loading 161
Paper Size/Type 154
Paper Texture 157
Paper Weight 159
Parallel [x] 172
PCL Emul 224
PDF 223
PostScript 223
Quality 219
Reports 164
Security Audit Log 181
Serial [x] 174
Set Date/Time 182
Settings 216
SMTP Setup 177
Standard Network 166
Standard USB 171
Substitute Size 157
TCP/IP 168
Universal Setup 163
Utilities 222
Wireless 170
XPS 223
menus diagram 152
message
e‑mail options 117
Miscellaneous Security Settings
menu 179
mobile device
printing from 94
moving the printer 11, 251, 252
Multi Send
adding a profile 25
setting up 25
multipurpose feeder
loading 78

Index

MyShortcut
about 25

N
Network [x] menu 166
Network [x] software error
[54] 281
Network Card menu 167
Network Reports menu 167
network settings
Embedded Web Server 253
network setup page
printing 65
Networking Guide
where to find 253
No analog phone line connected to
modem, fax is disabled. 281
noise emission levels 340
Non‑Lexmark [supply type], see
User’s Guide [33.xy] 281
non‑volatile memory 235
erasing 236
Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources [52] 281
notices 339, 340, 341, 342, 343,
344, 346, 347, 348, 349, 350
number of remaining pages
estimate 243

O
optional card
installing 35
options
2100‑sheet tray, installing 50
250‑sheet tray, installing 50
550‑sheet tray, installing 50
firmware cards 29
Internal Solutions Port,
installing 37
memory card 29, 33
printer hard disk, installing 42
printer hard disk, removing 48
updating in printer driver 56
options, copy screen
copy from 110
scale 111
options, touch‑screen
copy 110
e‑mail 117, 119
ordering
imaging unit 243

360

maintenance kit 244
ordering supplies
toner cartridge 243
organizing cables 53
original size
e‑mail options 118
scan options 150
output file type
changing 116

P
page setup
e‑mail options 119
fax options 142
scan options 150
paper
characteristics 87
different sizes, copying 104
letterhead 88
preprinted forms 88
recycled 88
saving 108
selecting 88
storing 87, 90
unacceptable 88
Universal size setting 66
using recycled 229
Paper changes needed 282
paper characteristics 87
paper feed troubleshooting
message remains after jam is
cleared 295
paper jams
avoiding 256
paper jams, clearing
behind rear door 263
duplex 266
in automatic document feeder top
cover 270
in manual feeder 268
in tray [x] 267
inside the printer 259
standard bin jam 265
upper rear door 262
Paper Loading menu 161
paper size
setting 66
Paper Size/Type menu 154
paper sizes
supported by the printer 90
Paper Texture menu 157

paper type
setting 66
paper types
supported by printer 92
Paper Weight menu 159
paper weights
supported by printer 92
Parallel [x] menu 172
Parallel port [x] disabled [56] 282
parts
checking status 242
checking, from printer control
panel 242
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 242
using genuine Lexmark 243
PCL Emul menu 224
PDF menu 223
Personal Identification Number
method
using 61
phone splitter 127
photos
copying 102
placing separator sheets between
copies 107
port settings
configuring 62
PostScript menu 223
power cord socket 53
preparing to set up the printer on
an Ethernet network 57
print irregularities 311
print job
canceling, from computer 99
print quality
cleaning the scanner glass 240
print quality troubleshooting
blank pages 309
characters have jagged edges 303
clipped pages or images 304
compressed images appear on
prints 305
gray background on prints 306
horizontal voids appear on
prints 307
print irregularities 311
print is too dark 312
print is too light 314
printer is printing solid black
pages 310

Index

repeating defects appear on
prints 315
shadow images appear on
prints 316
skewed print 316
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 317
streaked vertical lines 318
toner fog or background
shading 319
toner rubs off 320
toner specks appear on prints 320
transparency print quality is
poor 320
uneven print density 321
white streaks 321
print troubleshooting
envelope seals when printing 297
error reading flash drive 297
held jobs do not print 296
incorrect characters print 298
incorrect margins on prints 308
jammed pages are not
reprinted 294
job prints from wrong tray 298
job prints on wrong paper 298
jobs do not print 300
Large jobs do not collate 299
multiple‑language PDF files do not
print 299
paper curl 309
paper frequently jams 295
print job takes longer than
expected 301
tray linking does not work 302
unexpected page breaks
occur 303
printer
basic model 12
fully configured 12
minimum clearances 11
moving 11, 251, 252
selecting a location 11
shipping 252
printer configurations 12
printer control panel 16
factory defaults, restoring 255
indicator light 16
Sleep button light 16
Printer had to restart. Last job may
be incomplete. 282

361

printer hard disk
disposing of 235
encrypting 237
installing 42
removing 48
wiping 236
printer hard disk encryption 237
printer hard disk memory
erasing 236
printer IP address
finding 21
printer is printing blank pages 309
printer messages
[x]‑ page jam, open upper rear
door. [202] 262
[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder.
[250] 268
[x]‑page jam, lift front cover to
remove cartridge. [200–
201] 259
[x]‑page jam, open automatic
feeder top cover. [28y.xx] 270
[x]‑page jam, open tray [x].
[24x] 267
[x]‑page jam, open upper and
lower rear door. [231–234] 263
[x]‑page jam, remove standard bin
jam. [203] 265
[x]‑page jam, remove tray 1 to
clear duplex. [235–239] 266
Cartridge low [88.xy] 272
Cartridge nearly low [88.xy] 272
Cartridge very low, [x] estimated
pages remain [88.xy] 272
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] load [orientation] 272
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] load
[orientation] 272
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] load [orientation] 272
Change [paper source] to [paper
type] [paper size] load
[orientation] 273
Check tray [x] connection 273
Close door or insert cartridge 273
Close flatbed cover and load
originals if restarting job
[2yy.xx] 273
Close front door 274
Close top access cover 274

Complex page, some data may not
have printed [39] 274
Configuration change, some held
jobs were not restored [57] 274
Defective flash detected [51] 274
Disk full 62 274
Disk full, scan job canceled 274
Disk must be formatted for use in
this device 275
Disk near full. Securely clearing
disk space. 275
Error reading USB drive. Remove
USB. 275
Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 275
Fax memory full 275
Fax partition inoperative. Contact
system administrator. 275
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 275
Fax Station Name not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 276
Fax Station Number not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 276
Imaging unit low [84.xy] 276
Imaging unit nearly low
[84.xy] 276
Imaging unit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 276
Incompatible tray [x] [59] 276
Incorrect paper size, open [paper
source] [34] 276
Insert Tray [x] 277
Install duplex 277
Install Tray [x] 277
Insufficient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment operation
[37] 277
Insufficient memory to collate job
[37] 278
Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature [35] 278
Insufficient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted [37] 278
Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored
[37] 278

Index

Load [paper source] with [custom
string] [paper orientation] 278
Load [paper source] with [custom
type name [paper
orientation] 278
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] [paper orientation] 279
Load [paper source] with [paper
type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 279
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
string] [paper orientation] 279
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
type name] [paper
orientation] 279
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
size] [paper orientation] 280
Load manual feeder with [paper
type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 280
Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 280
Maintenance kit nearly low
[80.xy] 280
Maintenance kit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 280
Memory full [38] 280
Memory full, cannot print
faxes 280
Memory full, cannot send
faxes 281
Network [x] software error
[54] 281
No analog phone line connected
to modem, fax is disabled. 281
Non‑Lexmark [supply type], see
User’s Guide [33.xy] 281
Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources [52] 281
Paper changes needed 282
Parallel port [x] disabled [56] 282
Printer had to restart. Last job
may be incomplete. 282
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
cartridge [31.xy] 282
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
imaging unit [31.xy] 282
Remove defective disk [61] 283
Remove packaging material, [area
name] 283
Remove paper from standard
output bin 283

362

Replace all originals if restarting
job. 283
Replace cartridge, 0 estimated
pages remain [88.xy] 283
Replace cartridge, printer region
mismatch [42.xy] 283
Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated
pages remain [84.xy] 284
Replace jammed originals if
restarting job. 284
Replace last scanned page and
jammed originals if restarting
job. 284
Replace maintenance kit, 0
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 284
Replace missing fuser [80.xx] 284
Replace separator pad 285
Replace unsupported cartridge
[32.xy] 285
Replace unsupported imaging unit
[32.xy] 285
Replace wiper 285
Restore held jobs? 285
Scan document too long 285
Scanner automatic feeder cover
open 285
Scanner disabled by admin
[840.01] 285
Scanner disabled. Contact system
administrator if problem persists.
[840.02] 286
Scanner jam, remove all originals
from the scanner [2yy.xx] 286
Scanner jam, remove jammed
originals from the scanner
[2yy.xx] 286
Scanner maintenance required
soon, use ADF Kit [80] 286
Serial option [x] error [54] 286
Serial port [x] disabled [56] 286
Some held jobs were not
restored 286
Standard network software error
[54] 287
Standard USB port disabled
[56] 287
Supply needed to complete
job 287
Too many disks installed [58] 287
Too many flash options installed
[58] 287

Too many trays attached [58] 287
Tray [x] paper size
unsupported 288
Unformatted flash detected
[53] 288
Unsupported camera mode,
unplug camera and change
mode 288
Unsupported disk 288
Unsupported option in slot [x]
[55] 288
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 275
USB port [x] disabled [56] 288
Weblink server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 289
printer options troubleshooting
internal option is not
detected 291
internal print server 292
Internal Solutions Port 292
tray problems 293
USB/parallel interface card 294
printer parts
controller board 30
printer problems, solving basic 289
printer security
information on 238
printer software, installing
(Windows) 55
printing
canceling, from printer control
panel 99
directory list 99
font sample list 99
forms 93
from a mobile device 94
from flash drive 95
from Macintosh 93
from Windows 93
menu settings page 65
network setup page 65
printing a directory list 99
printing a document 93
printing a font sample list 99
printing a menu settings page 65
printing a network setup page 65
printing confidential and other held
jobs
from a Macintosh computer 98
from Windows 98
printing forms 93

Index

printing from a flash drive 95
printing from a mobile device 94
printing slows down 302
Push Button Configuration method
using 61

Q
Quality menu 219
Quiet Mode 230

R
recipient(s)
e‑mail options 117
recycled paper
using 88, 229
recycling
Lexmark packaging 233
Lexmark products 233
toner cartridges 233
reducing a copy 106
reducing noise 230
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
cartridge [31.xy] 282
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
imaging unit [31.xy] 282
Remote Operator Panel
setting up 27
Remove defective disk [61] 283
Remove packaging material, [area
name] 283
Remove paper from standard
output bin 283
removing printer hard disk 48
repeat print jobs 97
printing from a Macintosh
computer 98
printing from Windows 98
repeating defects appear on
prints 315
Replace all originals if restarting
job. 283
Replace cartridge, 0 estimated
pages remain [88.xy] 283
Replace cartridge, printer region
mismatch [42.xy] 283
Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated
pages remain [84.xy] 284
Replace jammed originals if
restarting job. 284

363

Replace last scanned page and
jammed originals if restarting
job. 284
Replace maintenance kit, 0
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 284
Replace missing fuser [80.xx] 284
Replace separator pad 285
Replace unsupported cartridge
[32.xy] 285
Replace unsupported imaging unit
[32.xy] 285
Replace wiper 285
replacing the toner
cartridge 245, 247
reports
viewing 253
Reports menu 164
reserve print jobs 97
printing from a Macintosh
computer 98
printing from Windows 98
resolution
e‑mail options 118
fax options 142
scan options 150
resolution, fax
changing 139
Restore held jobs? 285
restoring factory default
settings 255
RJ‑11 adapter 130

S
safety information 8, 9
Save As Shortcut
copy options 112
e‑mail options 117
scan options 149
saving paper 108
Scan document too long 285
scan options
darkness 150
file name 149
original size 150
page setup 150
resolution 150
Save As Shortcut 149
Scan Preview 151
send as 150
Scan Preview
scan options 151

scan preview
fax options 143
scan screen
content source 150
content type 150
Scan to Computer
setting up 148
Scan to Network
setting up 26
using 144
scan troubleshooting
cannot scan from a computer 332
partial document or photo
scans 332
scan job was not successful 333
scanner unit does not
close 325, 334
scanning takes too long or freezes
the computer 334
scanner
Automatic document feeder
(ADF) 15
functions 14
scanner glass 15
Scanner automatic feeder cover
open 285
Scanner disabled by admin
[840.01] 285
Scanner disabled. Contact system
administrator if problem persists.
[840.02] 286
scanner glass
cleaning 240
copying using 102
Scanner jam, remove all originals
from the scanner [2yy.xx] 286
Scanner jam, remove jammed
originals from the scanner
[2yy.xx] 286
Scanner maintenance required
soon, use ADF Kit [80] 286
scanning
from a flash drive 149
quick copy 101
to a computer 148
to a computer using the
Embedded Web Server 147
to an FTP address 145, 146
scanning to a computer 148
using the Embedded Web
Server 147
scanning to a flash drive 149

Index

scanning to an FTP address
creating shortcuts using the
computer 144
using a shortcut number 146
using the address book 146
using the printer control
panel 145
scanning to network
destinations 144
security
modifying confidential print
settings 98
Security Audit Log menu 181
security settings information
erasing 236
security Web page
where to find 238
selecting a location for the
printer 11
selecting paper 88
send as
e‑mail options 118
scan options 150
sending a fax 136
sending a fax using the printer
control panel 135
sending an e‑mail using the printer
control panel 115
sending fax
using shortcuts 136
using the address book 137
sending fax at a scheduled
time 137
sending fax using the address
book 137
Serial [x] menu 174
Serial option [x] error [54] 286
Serial port [x] disabled [56] 286
serial printing
setting up 63
Set Date/Time menu 182
setting
paper size 66
paper type 66
TCP/IP address 168
setting the fax number 134
setting the outgoing fax name 134
setting Universal paper size 66
setting up e‑mail alerts 253
setting up fax
country‑ or region‑specific 130
digital telephone service 128

364

DSL connection 126
standard telephone line
connection 122
VoIP connection 127
setting up fax and e‑mail
functions 330
setting up serial printing 63
setting up the printer
on an Ethernet network
(Macintosh only) 58
on an Ethernet network (Windows
only) 58
Settings menu 216
shipping the printer 252
shortcuts, creating
copy screen 103
e‑mail 114
fax destination 138
FTP address 145
FTP destination 144
showing icons on the home
screen 22
sides (duplex)
copy options 111
Sleep mode
adjusting 231
SMTP Setup menu 177
Some held jobs were not
restored 286
Standard Network menu 166
Standard network software error
54] 287
Standard USB menu 171
Standard USB port disabled
[56] 287
statement of volatility 235
status of parts
checking 242
status of supplies
checking 242
storing
paper 90
supplies 245
storing print jobs 97
streaked horizontal lines appear on
prints 317
streaked vertical lines appear on
prints 318
streaks appear 321
subject and message information
adding to e‑mail 116
Substitute Size menu 157

supplies
checking status 242
checking, from printer control
panel 242
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 242
conserving 229
storing 245
using genuine Lexmark 243
using recycled paper 229
supplies, ordering
imaging unit 243
maintenance kit 244
toner cartridge 243
Supply needed to complete job 287
supply notifications
configuring 254
supported flash drives 96
supported paper sizes 90
supported paper types 92
supported paper weights 92

T
TCP/IP menu 168
telecommunication
notices 344, 346, 347
the scanner does not respond 335
tips
card stock 85
labels, paper 86
on using envelopes 85
on using letterhead 86
transparencies 87
tips on using envelopes 85
tips on using letterhead 86
toner cartridge
ordering 243
replacing 245, 247
toner cartridges
recycling 233
toner darkness
adjusting 93
Too many disks installed [58] 287
Too many flash options installed
[58] 287
Too many trays attached [58] 287
touch screen
buttons 19
transparencies
copying on 102
loading 78
tips 87

Index

tray
loading 66
Tray [x] paper size
unsupported 288
trays
linking 82, 83
unlinking 82, 83
troubleshooting
an application error has
occurred 336
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 336
checking an unresponsive
printer 289
fax and e‑mail functions are not
set up 330
solving basic printer
problems 289
the scanner does not respond 335
troubleshooting, copy
copier does not respond 322
partial document or photo
copies 323
poor copy quality 323
poor scanned image quality 332
scanner unit does not
close 325, 334
troubleshooting, display
printer display is blank 291
troubleshooting, fax
caller ID is not shown 326
can receive but not send
faxes 328
can send but not receive
faxes 329
cannot send or receive a fax 326
received fax has poor print
quality 330
troubleshooting, paper feed
message remains after jam is
cleared 295
troubleshooting, print
envelope seals when printing 297
error reading flash drive 297
held jobs do not print 296
incorrect characters print 298
incorrect margins on prints 308
jammed pages are not
reprinted 294
job prints from wrong tray 298
job prints on wrong paper 298
jobs do not print 300

365

Large jobs do not collate 299
multiple‑language PDF files do not
print 299
paper curl 309
paper frequently jams 295
print job takes longer than
expected 301
tray linking does not work 302
unexpected page breaks
occur 303
troubleshooting, print quality
blank pages 309
characters have jagged edges 303
clipped pages or images 304
compressed images appear on
prints 305
gray background on prints 306
horizontal voids appear on
prints 307
print irregularities 311
print is too dark 312
print is too light 314
printer is printing solid black
pages 310
repeating defects appear on
prints 315
shadow images appear on
prints 316
skewed print 316
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 317
streaked vertical lines 318
toner fog or background
shading 319
toner rubs off 320
toner specks appear on prints 320
transparency print quality is
poor 320
uneven print density 321
white streaks on a page 321
troubleshooting, printer options
internal option is not
detected 291
internal print server 292
Internal Solutions Port 292
tray problems 293
USB/parallel interface card 294
troubleshooting, printing
printing slows down 302
troubleshooting, scan
cannot scan from a computer 332

partial document or photo
scans 332
scan job was not successful 333
scanner unit does not
close 325, 334
scanning takes too long or freezes
the computer 334

U
understanding the home screen
buttons and icons 17
uneven print density 321
Unformatted flash detected
[53] 288
Universal Paper Size
setting 66
Universal Setup menu 163
unlinking trays 82, 83
Unsupported camera mode, unplug
camera and change mode 288
Unsupported option in slot [x]
[55] 288
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 275
updating options in printer
driver 56
USB port 53
USB port [x] disabled [56] 288
USB/parallel interface card
troubleshooting 294
using a shortcut number
scanning to an FTP address 146
using Forms and Favorites 93
using Hibernate mode 232
using recycled paper 229
using shortcuts
sending fax 136
using the address book 116
sending fax 137
using the touch‑screen buttons 19
Utilities menu 222

V
verify print jobs 97
printing from a Macintosh
computer 98
printing from Windows 98
vertical voids appear 321
viewing
reports 253
viewing a fax log 139

Index

virtual display
checking, using Embedded Web
Server 253
voice mail
setting up 122
Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
fax setup 127
voids appear 321
VoIP adapter 127
volatile memory 235
erasing 235
volatility
statement of 235

W
Weblink server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 289
wiping the printer hard disk 236
Wireless menu 170
wireless network
configuration information 59
wireless network setup
using the Embedded Web
Server 61
wireless setup wizard
using 60

X
XPS menu 223

366

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : Yes
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04
Format                          : application/pdf
Description                     : XM5100 Series
Title                           : User's Guide
Creator                         : Lexmark International, Inc.
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 9.5.2 (Windows)
Keywords                        : v22654089
Creator Tool                    : AH Formatter V5.3 MR1 (5,3,2011,0610) for Windows
Modify Date                     : 2012:09:22 11:55:23-04:00
Create Date                     : 2012:09:22 11:55:23-04:00
Document ID                     : uuid:da999d81-afef-4bdd-b1da-419ddc7e89f3
Instance ID                     : uuid:b7cec17c-af5c-479b-92a1-9b56f75e6b89
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 366
Author                          : Lexmark International, Inc.
Subject                         : XM5100 Series

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Lexmark Xm5163 Owner S Manual User's Guide

Lexmark-Lexmark-Xm5170-Owner-S-Manual lexmark-lexmark-xm5170-owner-s-manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation